HP Hewlett Packard M375 User Manual

LASERJET PRO 300 COLOR MFP  
LASERJET PRO 400 COLOR MFP  
User Guide  
M375  
M475  
HP LaserJet Pro 300 color MFP M375  
and HP LaserJet Pro 400 color MFP  
M475  
User Guide  
Copyright and License  
Trademark Credits  
Adobe®, Acrobat®, and PostScript® are  
trademarks of Adobe Systems  
Incorporated.  
© 2011 Copyright Hewlett-Packard  
Development Company, L.P.  
Reproduction, adaptation, or translation  
without prior written permission is  
prohibited, except as allowed under the  
copyright laws.  
Intel® Core™ is a trademark of Intel  
Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.  
Java™ is a US trademark of Sun  
Microsystems, Inc.  
The information contained herein is subject  
to change without notice.  
Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows® XP, and  
Windows Vista® are U.S. registered  
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.  
The only warranties for HP products and  
services are set forth in the express  
warranty statements accompanying such  
products and services. Nothing herein  
should be construed as constituting an  
additional warranty. HP shall not be liable  
for technical or editorial errors or omissions  
contained herein.  
UNIX® is a registered trademark of The  
Open Group.  
ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR  
mark are registered U.S. marks.  
Edition 2, 10/2011  
Part number: CE863-90907  
Conventions used in this guide  
TIP: Tips provide helpful hints or shortcuts.  
NOTE: Notes provide important information to explain a concept or to complete a task.  
CAUTION: Cautions indicate procedures that you should follow to avoid losing data or damaging  
the product.  
WARNING! Warnings alert you to specific procedures that you should follow to avoid personal  
injury, catastrophic loss of data, or extensive damage to the product.  
ENWW  
iii  
 
iv  
Conventions used in this guide  
ENWW  
Table of contents  
2 Control panel menus .................................................................................................................................... 13  
3 Software for Windows .................................................................................................................................. 37  
ENWW  
v
4 Use the product with Mac ............................................................................................................................ 45  
5 Connect the product with Windows ............................................................................................................ 61  
HP Smart Install for Windows wireless networks, method 1: Use the product control  
vi  
ENWW  
HP Smart Install for Windows wireless networks, method 2: Temporarily connect a  
6 Paper and print media .................................................................................................................................. 71  
7 Print cartridges ............................................................................................................................................. 87  
8 Print tasks .................................................................................................................................................... 107  
ENWW  
vii  
9 Color ............................................................................................................................................................. 139  
10 Copy ........................................................................................................................................................... 145  
viii  
ENWW  
11 Scan ........................................................................................................................................................... 161  
12 Fax .............................................................................................................................................................. 169  
ENWW  
ix  
13 Manage and maintain ............................................................................................................................... 229  
14 Solve problems ......................................................................................................................................... 245  
x
ENWW  
ENWW  
xi  
The control panel displays the message: The wireless feature on this product has  
The printer driver does not automatically set up the selected product in the Print &  
When connected with a USB cable, the product does not appear in the Print & Fax list  
Appendix A Supplies and accessories ........................................................................................................ 285  
Appendix B Service and support ................................................................................................................. 287  
Appendix C Product specifications ............................................................................................................. 297  
Appendix D Regulatory information ............................................................................................................ 299  
xii  
ENWW  
ENWW  
xiii  
Product comparison  
HP LaserJet Pro 300  
color MFP M375nw  
HP LaserJet Pro 400  
color MFP M475dn  
HP LaserJet Pro 400  
color MFP M475dw  
CE903A  
CE863A  
CE864A  
Paper handling  
Tray 1 (50-sheet  
capacity)  
Tray 2 (250-sheet  
capacity  
Optional Tray 3 (250-  
sheet capacity)  
Standard output bin (150-  
sheet capacity)  
Automatic duplex printing  
Windows XP, 32-bit  
Supported operating  
systems  
Windows Vista, 32-bit  
and 64-bit  
Windows 7, 32-bit and  
64-bit  
Windows 2003 Server  
(32-bit, Service Pack 3),  
printer and scan drivers  
only  
Windows 2008 Server,  
printer and scan drivers  
only  
Windows 2008 Server  
R2, printer and scan  
drivers only  
Mac OS X v10.5 and  
later  
Connectivity  
Hi-Speed USB 2.0  
10/100 Ethernet LAN  
connection  
Wireless network  
connection  
HP Smart Install for easy  
software installation  
(Windows only)  
Memory  
192 MB RAM,  
expandable to 448 MB  
2
Chapter 1 Product basics  
ENWW  
   
HP LaserJet Pro 300  
color MFP M375nw  
HP LaserJet Pro 400  
color MFP M475dn  
HP LaserJet Pro 400  
color MFP M475dw  
CE903A  
CE863A  
CE864A  
Control-panel display  
Print  
Color graphical touch  
screen  
Prints 18 pages per  
minute (ppm) on A4-size  
paper and 19 ppm on  
Letter-size paper  
Prints 20 pages per  
minute (ppm) on A4-size  
paper and 21 ppm on  
Letter-size paper  
Automatic duplex printing  
Walk-up USB printing (no  
computer required  
Copy  
Copies at up to 18 ppm  
Copies at up to 20 ppm  
Copy resolution is 300  
dots per inch (dpi)  
50-page document  
feeder that supports  
page sizes from 127 to  
356 mm (5 to 14 in) in  
length and from 127 to  
216 mm (5 to 8.5 in) in  
width  
Flatbed scanner supports  
page sizes up to 297 mm  
(11.7 in) in length and up  
to 215 mm (8.5 in) in  
width  
Automatic duplex  
copying  
Product comparison  
ENWW  
3
HP LaserJet Pro 300  
color MFP M375nw  
HP LaserJet Pro 400  
color MFP M475dn  
HP LaserJet Pro 400  
color MFP M475dw  
CE903A  
CE863A  
CE864A  
Scan  
Scans in black and white  
with resolution up to  
1200 dpi  
Scans in color with  
resolution up to 600 dpi  
Automatic duplex  
scanning  
Walk-up USB scanning  
(no computer required)  
Fax  
V.34 with two RJ-11 fax  
ports  
4
Chapter 1 Product basics  
ENWW  
Environmental features  
Duplex printing  
Save paper by using the manual duplex printing option. Automatic duplex printing is available  
with the HP LaserJet Pro 400 color MFP M475dn and HP LaserJet Pro 400 color MFP  
M475dw models.  
Print multiple pages per  
sheet  
Save paper by printing two or more pages of a document side-by-side on one sheet of paper.  
Access this feature through the printer driver.  
Copies multiple pages per  
sheet  
Save paper by copying two or four pages of an original document side-by-side on one sheet  
of paper.  
Recycling  
Reduce waste by using recycled paper.  
Recycle print cartridges by using the HP Planet Partners return process.  
Energy savings  
Instant on Fusing technology and sleep mode enable this product to quickly go into reduced  
power states when not printing, thus saving energy.  
Accessibility features  
The product includes several features that aid users with accessibility issues.  
Online user guide that is compatible with text screen-readers.  
Print cartridges can be installed and removed by using one hand.  
All doors and covers can be opened by using one hand.  
Environmental features  
ENWW  
5
     
Product views  
Front view  
1
Document feeder cover  
2
Document feeder input tray  
Document feeder input tray extension  
Document feeder output bin  
Color touch screen control panel  
Control-panel-adjustment lever  
DIMM access door  
3
4
5
6
7
8
Walk-up USB printing port  
On/Off button  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
Optional Tray 3  
Tray 2 (access for clearing jams)  
Tray 1  
Print-cartridge-door handle  
Output bin stop  
Output bin  
6
Chapter 1 Product basics  
ENWW  
     
Back view  
1
2
3
4
5
Fax ports  
Network port  
Hi-Speed USB 2.0 port  
Power connection  
Rear door (access for clearing jams)  
Product views  
ENWW  
7
   
Interface ports  
1
2
3
4
Telephone “line out” port for attaching an extension phone, answering machine, or other device  
Fax “line in” port for attaching fax line to product  
Network port  
Hi-Speed USB 2.0 port  
8
Chapter 1 Product basics  
ENWW  
   
Serial number and model number location  
The serial number and product model number label is at the back of the product.  
NOTE: Another label is inside the front door.  
Product views  
ENWW  
9
   
Control panel layout  
1
2
Touch screen display  
Wireless light: indicates the wireless network is enabled. The light blinks while the product is establishing a  
connection to the wireless network. When connected, the light stops blinking and stays lit.  
NOTE: Wireless models only  
3
4
5
Ready light: indicates the product is ready  
Attention light: indicates a problem with the product  
Help button and light: provides access to the control panel help system  
6
Right arrow button and light: moves the cursor to the right or moves the display image to the next screen  
NOTE: This button illuminates only when the current screen can use this feature.  
Cancel button and light: clears settings, cancels the current job or exits the current screen.  
NOTE: This button illuminates only when the current screen can use this feature.  
Back button and light: returns to the previous screen  
7
8
NOTE: This button illuminates only when the current screen can use this feature.  
Left arrow button and light: moves the cursor to the left  
9
NOTE: This button illuminates only when the current screen can use this feature.  
Home button and light: provides access to the Home screen  
10  
10  
Chapter 1 Product basics  
ENWW  
   
Buttons on the Home screen  
The Home screen provides access to the product features, and it indicates the product status.  
NOTE: Depending on the product configuration, the features on the Home screen can vary. The  
layout might also be reversed for some languages.  
1
Web Services button: provides quick access to HP Web Services features, including HP ePrint.  
HP ePrint is a tool that prints documents by using any e-mail enabled device to send them to the product’s e-mail  
address.  
2
3
Setup  
button: provides access to the main menus  
Network  
button: provides access to network settings and information. From the network settings screen,  
you can print the Network Summary page.  
4
Wireless  
button: provides access to the Wireless menu and wireless status information.  
NOTE: Wireless models only  
NOTE: When you are connected to a wireless network, this icon changes to a set of signal strength bars.  
5
6
Information  
button: provides product status information. From the status summary screen, you can print the  
Configuration Report page.  
Supplies  
button: provides information about supplies status. From the supplies summary screen, you can print  
the Supplies Status page.  
7
Fax button: provides access to the fax feature  
8
Apps button: provides access to the Apps menu to print directly from select Web applications  
Product status  
9
10  
11  
12  
Scan button: provides access to the scan feature  
Copy button: provides access to the copy feature  
USB button: provides access to the walk-up USB printing and scanning feature (no computer is required)  
Product views  
ENWW  
11  
 
Control panel help system  
The product has a built-in Help system that explains how to use each screen. To open the Help  
system, touch the Help button in the upper-right corner of the screen.  
For some screens, the Help opens to a global menu where you can search for specific topics. You  
can browse through the menu structure by touching the buttons in the menu.  
Some Help screens include animations that guide you through procedures, such as clearing jams.  
For screens that contain settings for individual jobs, the Help opens to a topic that explains the  
options for that screen.  
If the product alerts you of an error or warning, touch the Help button to open a message that  
describes the problem. The message also contains instructions to help solve the problem.  
12  
Chapter 1 Product basics  
ENWW  
 
2 Control panel menus  
ENWW  
13  
 
Setup Menu  
To open this menu, touch the Setup  
button. The following sub menus are available:  
HP Web Services  
Reports  
Quick Forms  
Fax Setup  
System Setup  
Service  
Network Setup  
14  
Chapter 2 Control panel menus  
ENWW  
   
HP Web Services menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Enable Web Services  
Enables HP Web Services so you can use HP ePrint and the Apps menu.  
HP ePrint is a tool that prints documents by using any e-mail enabled device to send them  
to the product’s e-mail address.  
Use the Apps menu to print directly from select Web applications.  
Select whether to display the product's IP address on the control panel.  
Display E-Mail Address  
Print Information Sheet  
Print a page that contains the e-mail address for the product as well as other information  
for HP Web Services.  
Turn ePrint On/Off  
Turn Apps On/Off  
Turn HP ePrint on or off.  
Turn the Apps feature on or off.  
Remove HP Web Services from this product.  
Remove Web Services  
Setup Menu  
ENWW  
15  
   
Reports menu  
Use the Reports menu to print reports that provide information about the product.  
Menu item  
Description  
Demo Page  
Menu Structure  
Prints a page that demonstrates print quality  
Prints a map of the control panel-menu layout. The active settings for each menu  
are listed.  
Configuration Report  
Supplies Status  
Prints a list of all the product settings. Includes basic network information when  
the product is connected to a network.  
Prints the status for each print cartridge, including the following information:  
Estimated percentage of cartridge life remaining  
Approximate pages remaining  
Part numbers for HP print cartridges  
Number of pages printed  
Information about ordering new HP print cartridges and recycling used HP  
print cartridges  
Network Summary  
Usage Page  
Prints a list of all product network settings  
Prints a page that lists pages that were jammed or mispicked in the product,  
monochrome (black and white) or color pages, and reports the count for pages  
scanned, faxed, and copied.  
PCL Font List  
PS Font List  
Prints a list of all the PCL fonts that are installed.  
Prints a list of all the PostScript (PS) fonts that are installed  
Prints a list of all the PCL6 fonts that are installed  
PCL6 Font List  
Color Usage Log  
Prints a report that shows the user name, application name, and color usage  
information on a job-by-job basis  
Service Page  
Prints the service report  
Diagnostics Page  
Print Quality Page  
Prints the calibration and color diagnostics pages  
Prints a page that helps solve problems with print quality  
16  
Chapter 2 Control panel menus  
ENWW  
                       
Quick Forms menu  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Narrow Rule  
Wide Rule  
Child Rule  
1/8 inch  
Description  
Notebook Paper  
Prints pages that have preprinted lines  
Graph Paper  
Checklist  
Prints pages that have preprinted graph lines  
5 mm  
1-Column  
2-Column  
Portrait  
Prints pages that have preprinted lines with check boxes  
Prints pages that have preprinted lines for writing music  
Music Paper  
Landscape  
Setup Menu  
ENWW  
17  
           
Fax Setup menu  
In the following table, items that have an asterisk (*) indicate the factory default setting.  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Description  
Fax Set-Up Utility  
This is a tool for configuring the fax settings. Follow the on-  
screen prompts and select the appropriate response for each  
question.  
Basic Setup  
Time/Date  
(Settings for time  
format, current time,  
date format, and  
current date.)  
Sets the time and date setting for the product.  
Fax Header  
Enter your fax  
number.  
Sets the identifying information that is sent to the receiving  
product.  
Enter company  
name.  
Answer Mode  
Automatic*  
Manual  
TAM  
Sets the type of answer mode. The following options are  
available:  
Automatic: The product automatically answers an incoming  
call on the configured number of rings.  
Fax/Tel  
Manual: The user must press the Start Fax button or use an  
extension phone (press buttons 1-2-3 on the extension  
phone) to make the product answer the incoming call.  
TAM: A telephone answering machine (TAM) is attached to  
the Aux phone port of the product. The product will listen for  
fax tones after the answering machine has picked up the  
call-and pick up a call if fax tones are detected.  
Fax/Tel: The product will automatically pick up all calls and  
determine if the call is a voice or fax call. If the call is a fax  
call, the product handles the call as an incoming fax. If the  
incoming call is detected as a voice call, the product will  
generate an audible synthesized ring to alert the user of an  
incoming voice call.  
Rings to Answer  
Sets the number of rings that must occur before the fax modem  
answers. The default setting is 5.  
18  
Chapter 2 Control panel menus  
ENWW  
     
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
All Rings*  
Single  
Description  
Distinctive Ring  
If you have distinctive ring phone service, use this item to  
configure how the product responds to incoming calls.  
All Rings: The product answers all ring patterns or calls that  
come through the telephone line.  
Double  
Triple  
Single: The product answers any calls that produce a  
single-ring pattern.  
Double and Triple  
Double: The product answers any calls that produce a  
double-ring pattern.  
Triple: The product answers any calls that produce a triple-  
ring pattern.  
Double and Triple: The product answers any calls that  
produce a double-ring or triple-ring pattern.  
Dial Prefix  
On  
Specifies a prefix number that must be dialed when sending  
faxes from the product. If you turn this feature on, the product  
prompts you to enter the number and then it automatically  
includes that number every time you send a fax.  
Off*  
Advanced Setup  
Fax Resolution  
Standard  
Fine*  
Sets the resolution for sent documents. Higher resolution images  
have more dots per inch (dpi), so they show more detail. Lower  
resolution images have fewer dots per inch and show less detail,  
but the file size is smaller and the fax takes less time to transmit.  
Superfine  
Photo  
Lighter/Darker  
Fit to Page  
Sets the darkness of outgoing faxes.  
On*  
Off  
Shrinks incoming faxes that are larger than the paper size set for  
the tray.  
Glass Size  
Letter  
A4  
Sets the default paper size for documents being scanned from  
the flatbed scanner.  
Dialing Mode  
Redial if Busy  
Redial if No Answer  
Tone*  
Pulse  
On*  
Off  
Sets whether the product should use tone or pulse dialing.  
Sets whether the product should attempt to redial if the line is  
busy.  
On  
Sets whether the product should attempt to redial if the recipient  
fax number does not answer.  
Off*  
Redial if Comm. Error On*  
Off  
Sets whether the product should attempt to redial the recipient  
fax number if a communication error occurs.  
Detect Dial Tone  
On  
Sets whether the product should check for a dial tone before  
sending a fax.  
Off*  
Setup Menu  
ENWW  
19  
   
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Description  
Billing Codes  
On  
Enables the use of billing codes when set to On. A prompt  
appears where you can enter the billing code for an outgoing fax.  
Off*  
On*  
Off  
Extension Phone  
When this feature is enabled, you can press the 1-2-3 buttons on  
the extension phone to cause the product to answer an incoming  
fax call.  
Stamp Faxes  
On  
Sets the product to print the date, time, sender's phone number,  
and page number on each page of incoming faxes.  
Off*  
On  
Private Receive  
Setting the Private Receive feature to On requires you to set a  
product password. After setting the password, the following  
options are set:  
Off*  
The Private Receive feature is turned on.  
All old faxes are deleted from memory.  
Fax forwarding is set to Off and is not allowed to be  
changed.  
All incoming faxes are stored in memory.  
Confirm Fax Number  
Allow Fax Reprint  
Fax/Tel Ring Time  
On  
Confirm a fax number by entering it a second time.  
Off*  
On*  
Sets whether incoming faxes are stored in memory for reprinting  
later.  
Off  
20*  
Sets the time, in seconds, after which the product should stop  
sounding the Fax/Tel audible ring to notify the user of an  
incoming voice call.  
30  
40  
70  
Print Duplex  
Fax Speed  
On  
Sets duplex printing as the default for faxes.  
NOTE: This item is available only for duplex models.  
Sets the allowed fax communication speed.  
Off*  
Fast (V.34)*  
Medium (V.17)  
Slow (V.29)  
20  
Chapter 2 Control panel menus  
ENWW  
System Setup menu  
In the following table, items that have an asterisk (*) indicate the factory default setting.  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Description  
Language  
(List of available  
control-panel  
display  
Sets the language in which the control panel displays  
messages and product reports.  
languages.)  
Paper Setup  
Default Paper Size Letter  
Sets the size for printing internal reports, faxes, or any  
print job that does not specify a size.  
A4  
Legal  
Default Paper  
Type  
Lists available  
Sets the type for printing internal reports, faxes, or any  
print job that does not specify a type.  
paper types.  
Paper Type  
Paper Size  
Paper Type  
Paper Size  
Wait forever*  
Cancel  
Tray 1  
Select the default size and type for Tray 1 from the list  
of available sizes and types.  
Tray 2  
Select the default size and type for Tray 2 from the list  
of available sizes and types.  
Paper Out Action  
Determines how the product reacts when a print job  
requires a paper size or type that is unavailable or  
when the tray is empty.  
Override  
Wait forever: The product waits until you load the  
correct paper.  
Override: Print on a different size paper after a  
specified delay.  
Cancel: Automatically cancel the print job after a  
specified delay.  
If you select either the Override or Cancel item,  
the control panel prompts you for the number of  
seconds to delay.  
Print Quality  
Color Calibration  
Calibrate Now  
Performs a full calibration.  
Power-On  
Calibration  
Calibrate Now: Performs an immediate  
calibration.  
Power-On Calibration: Specify the length of time  
the product should wait after you turn it on before  
it calibrates.  
Adjust Alignment  
Print Test Page  
Use this menu to shift the margin alignment to center  
the image on the page from top to bottom and from left  
to right. Before adjusting these values, print a test  
page. It provides alignment guides in the X and Y  
directions so you can determine which adjustments are  
necessary.  
Setup Menu  
ENWW  
21  
   
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
X1 Shift  
Description  
Adjust Tray <X>  
Use the X1 Shift setting to center the image from side  
to side on a single-sided page or for the second side of  
a two-sided page.  
X2 Shift  
Y Shift  
Use the X2 Shift setting to center the image from side  
to side on the first side of a two-sided page.  
Use the Y Shift setting to center the image from top to  
bottom on the page.  
Energy Settings  
Sleep Delay  
15 Minutes*  
30 Minutes  
1 Hour  
Sets how long the product remains idle before it enters  
Sleep mode. The product automatically exits Sleep  
mode when you send a print job or press a control  
panel button.  
NOTE: The default Sleep Delay time is 15 minutes.  
2 Hours  
Off  
1 Minute  
Auto Power Down Power Down  
Delay  
30 Minutes*  
1 Hour  
Select the length of time after which the product  
automatically turns off.  
NOTE: The default Power Down Delay time is 30  
2 Hours  
minutes.  
4 Hours  
8 Hours  
24 Hours  
Never  
Wake Events  
USB Job  
LAN Job  
Wireless Job  
Button Press  
Select whether the product wakes when it receives  
each of these types of jobs or actions.  
The default for each option is Yes.  
Volume Settings  
Alarm Volume  
Ring Volume  
Set the volume levels for the product. The following  
options are available for each volume setting:  
Off  
Key-Press Volume  
Soft  
Phone Line  
Volume  
Medium*  
Loud  
Time/Date  
(Settings for time  
format, current  
Sets the time and date setting for the product.  
time, date format,  
and current date.)  
22  
Chapter 2 Control panel menus  
ENWW  
 
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Description  
Product Security  
On  
Sets the product-security feature. If you select the On  
setting, you must set a password.  
Off  
USB Flash Drive  
Disable Fax  
On  
Enable or disable printing directly from the USB port on  
the front of the product.  
Off  
On  
Enable or disable the Fax feature.  
Off  
Supply Settings  
Black Cartridge  
Very Low Setting  
Prompt  
Continue*  
Stop  
Set how the product behaves when the black print  
cartridge reaches the very low threshold.  
Prompt: The product stops printing and prompts  
you to replace the print cartridge. You can  
acknowledge the prompt and continue printing. A  
customer configurable option on this product is  
"Prompt to Remind Me in 100 pages, 200 pages,  
300 pages, or never." This option is provided as a  
customer convenience and is not an indication  
these pages will have acceptable print quality.  
Continue: The product alerts you that the print  
cartridge is very low, but it continues printing.  
Stop: The product stops printing until you replace  
the print cartridge.  
Low Threshold  
Enter percentage Use the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the  
percentage of estimated life remaining at which the  
product alerts you that the print cartridge is low.  
For the black cartridge that ships with the product, the  
default is 27%. For the standard replacement black  
print cartridge, the default is 15%. For the high-  
capacity replacement black print cartridge, the default  
is 8%.  
The default values are intended to provide  
approximately two weeks of use before the cartridge  
reaches the very low state.  
Setup Menu  
ENWW  
23  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Stop  
Description  
Color Cartridges  
Very Low Setting  
Set how the product behaves when the one of the  
color print cartridges reaches the very low threshold.  
Prompt  
Prompt: The product stops printing and prompts  
you to replace the print cartridge. You can  
Continue  
Print Black*  
acknowledge the prompt and continue printing. A  
customer configurable option on this product is  
"Prompt to Remind Me in 100 pages, 200 pages,  
300 pages, or never." This option is provided as a  
customer convenience and is not an indication  
these pages will have acceptable print quality.  
Continue: The product alerts you that the print  
cartridge is very low, but it continues printing.  
Print Black: The product has been customer  
configured to print using only the black print  
cartridge when the level of a color supply is very  
low. The color supply might still be able to  
produce acceptable print quality. To print in color,  
either replace the color supply or reconfigure the  
product.  
When you choose to replace the very low print  
cartridge, color printing resumes automatically.  
Stop: The product stops printing until you replace  
the print cartridge.  
Low Threshold  
Cyan  
Enter percentage  
Magenta  
Yellow  
Use the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the  
percentage of estimated life remaining at which the  
product alerts you that the print cartridge is low.  
For the color print cartridges that ship with the product,  
the default is 20%. For the replacement color print  
cartridges, the default is 10%.  
The default values are intended to provide  
approximately two weeks of use before the cartridge  
reaches the very low state.  
24  
Chapter 2 Control panel menus  
ENWW  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Description  
Store Usage Data On Supply*  
Not on Supply  
The product automatically stores print cartridge usage  
data in its internal memory. It can also store this data  
on memory chips in the print cartridges. Select the Not  
on Supply option to store the data only in the product  
memory.  
The information stored on the print cartridge memory  
chip helps HP design future products to meet our  
customers' printing needs. HP collects a sampling of  
memory chips from print cartridges returned to HP's  
free return and recycling program. The memory chips  
from this sampling are read and studied in order to  
improve future HP products.  
The data collected from the print cartridge memory  
chip does not contain information that can be used to  
identify a customer or user of the print cartridge or their  
product.  
Courier Font  
Color Copy  
Regular  
Dark  
On  
Sets Courier font values.  
Enables or disables color copying.  
Off  
Setup Menu  
ENWW  
25  
Service menu  
In the following table, items that have an asterisk (*) indicate the factory default setting.  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Clear Saved Faxes  
Run Fax Test  
Sub-menu item  
Description  
Fax Service  
Clears all faxes in memory.  
Performs a fax test to verify that the phone cord is plugged  
in the correct outlet and that there is a signal on the phone  
line. A fax test report is printed indicating the results.  
Print T.30 Trace  
Now  
Prints or schedules a report that is used to troubleshoot fax  
transmission issues.  
Never*  
If Error  
At End of Call  
On*  
Error Correction  
Fax Service Log  
The error correction mode allows the sending device to re-  
transmit data if it detects an error signal.  
Off  
The fax service log prints out the last 40 entries in the fax  
log.  
Cleaning Page  
Cleans the product when specks or other marks appear on  
printed output. The cleaning process removes dust and  
excess toner from the paper path.  
When selected, the product prompts you to load plain  
Letter or A4 paper in Tray 1. Touch the OK button to begin  
the cleaning process. Wait until the process completes.  
Discard the page that prints.  
NOTE: For models that do not have an automatic  
duplexer, the product prints the first side and then prompts  
you to remove the page from the output bin and reload it in  
Tray 1, keeping the same orientation.  
USB Speed  
High*  
Full  
Sets the USB speed for the USB connection to the  
computer. For the product to actually operate at high  
speed, it must have high speed enabled and be connected  
to an EHCI host controller that is also operating at high  
speed. This menu item also does not reflect the current  
operating speed of the product.  
Less Paper  
Curl  
On  
When printed pages are consistently curled, this option  
sets the product to a mode that reduces curl.  
Off*  
On  
Archive Print  
When printing pages that will be stored for a long time, this  
option sets the product to a mode that reduces toner  
smearing and dusting.  
Off*  
Firmware  
Datecode  
Displays the current firmware datecode  
26  
Chapter 2 Control panel menus  
ENWW  
   
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Description  
Restore  
Defaults  
Sets all settings to the factory default values  
HP Smart  
Install  
On*  
Off  
Enable or disable the HP Smart Install tool.  
Disable the tool if you want to connect to a network by  
using an Ethernet cable.  
If you disable HP Smart Install, you must use the product  
software CD to install the product software.  
Setup Menu  
ENWW  
27  
Network Setup menu  
In the following table, items that have an asterisk (*) indicate the factory default setting.  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Description  
Wireless Menu  
Wireless Direct Settings Wireless Direct On/Off  
Wireless Direct Name  
Enables or disables the Direct Wi-Fi wireless access  
feature.  
NOTE: You can also  
access this menu by  
touching the Wireless  
button on the control  
panel.  
Set the product's Direct Wifi name, so you can access it  
from other wireless devices that support the Wi-Fi Direct  
protocol.  
Wireless Direct Mode  
Set the product's Direct Wifi mode.  
Select the Print Only option (the default setting) to  
allow wireless access to only the product print  
functions from a mobile device.  
Select the Open Network option to allow wireless  
access to all product functions and settings from a  
mobile device.  
Wireless Setup Wizard  
Wi-Fi Protected Setup  
Guides you through the steps to set up the product on a  
wireless network  
If your wireless router supports this feature, use this  
method to set up the product on a wireless network. This  
is the simplest method.  
Run Network Test  
Tests the wireless network and prints a report with the  
results.  
Turn Wireless On/Off  
Automatic*  
Enables or disables the wireless network feature.  
TCP/IP Config  
Automatic: The product automatically configures all the  
TCP/IP settings via DHCP, BootP or AutoIP.  
Manual  
Manual: You can manually configure the IP address,  
subnet mask, and default gateway. The control panel  
prompts you to specify values for each address section.  
As each address is completed, the product prompts for  
address confirmation before moving to the next one. After  
all three addresses are set, the network reinitializes.  
Auto Crossover  
On*  
Off  
Enables or disables the use of a standard 10/100 network  
cable when the product is directly connected to a  
computer.  
Network Services  
Link Speed  
IPv4  
Enable or disable the IPv4 and IPv6 protocols. By default,  
each protocol is enabled.  
IPv6  
Automatic*  
10T Full  
10T Half  
100TX Full  
100TX Half  
Sets the link speed manually if needed.  
After setting the link speed, the product automatically  
restarts.  
28  
Chapter 2 Control panel menus  
ENWW  
     
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Description  
HTTPS Enforcement  
Yes  
No*  
Sets the product so that it communicates only with Web  
sites that use hypertext transfer protocol secure (HTTPS).  
Restore Defaults  
Resets all network configurations to their factory defaults.  
Setup Menu  
ENWW  
29  
Function specific menus  
The product features function-specific menus for copying, faxing, and scanning. To open these  
menus, touch the button for that function on the control panel.  
Copy menu  
To open this menu, touch the Copy button, and then touch the Settings... button.  
NOTE: Settings that you change with this menu expire 2 minutes after the last copy completes.  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Description  
ID Copy  
Copies both sides of  
identification cards, or other  
small-size documents, onto the  
same side of one sheet of  
paper.  
NOTE: This item is available  
from the main Copy screen. You  
do not need to touch the  
Settings... button to access it.  
Number of Copies  
Reduce/Enlarge  
(1–99)  
Specifies the number of copies  
Specifies the size of the copy.  
Original=100%*  
Legal to Letter=78%  
Legal to A4=83%  
A4 to Letter=94%  
Letter to A4=97%  
Full Page=91%  
Fit to Page  
2 Pages per Sheet  
4 Pages per Sheet  
Custom: 25 to 400%  
Lighter/Darker  
Optimize  
Specifies the contrast of the  
copy.  
Describe Original  
Auto Select*  
Mixed  
Specifies the type of content in  
the original document, so the  
copy is the best match for the  
original.  
Text  
Picture  
Paper  
Paper Size  
Paper Type  
Specifies the paper size and  
type for copies.  
30  
Chapter 2 Control panel menus  
ENWW  
     
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Description  
Multi-Page Copy  
Off*  
On  
When this feature is on, the  
product prompts you to load  
another page onto the scanner  
glass or to indicate that the job  
is complete.  
Collation  
On*  
Specifies whether to collate  
copy jobs  
Off  
Tray Select  
Auto Select*  
Tray 1  
Specifies which tray to use for  
copies.  
Tray 2  
Two Sided  
1-Sided to 1-Sided*  
1-Sided to 2-Sided  
2-Sided to 1-Sided  
2-Sided to 2-Sided  
Off*  
Specifies the duplex setting for  
copies.  
NOTE: This item is available  
for duplex models only.  
Draft Mode  
Specifies whether to use draft-  
quality printing for copies  
On  
Image Adjustment  
Lightness  
Adjusts the image quality  
settings for copies  
Contrast  
Sharpen  
Background Removal  
Color Balance  
Grayness  
Set as New Defaults  
Restore Defaults  
Saves any changes you have  
made to this menu as the new  
defaults  
Restores the factory defaults for  
this menu  
Function specific menus  
ENWW  
31  
Fax menu  
To open this menu, touch the Fax button, and then touch the Fax Menu button.  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
On Every Fax  
On Send Fax Only  
On Receive Fax Only  
Never*  
Description  
Fax Reports  
Fax Confirmation  
Sets whether the product prints  
a confirmation report after a fax  
job.  
Include First Page  
Fax Error Report  
On*  
Sets whether the product  
includes a thumbnail image of  
the first page of the fax on the  
report.  
Off  
On Every Error*  
On Send Error  
On Receive Error  
Never  
Sets whether the product prints  
a report after a failed fax job.  
Print Last Call Report  
Fax Activity Log  
Prints a detailed report of the  
last fax operation, either sent or  
received.  
Print Log Now  
Auto Log Print  
Print Log Now: Prints a list of  
the faxes that have been sent  
from or received by this product.  
Auto Log Print: Automatically  
prints a report after every fax  
job.  
Print Phone Book  
Print Junk Fax list  
Print Billing Report  
Prints a list of the speed dials  
that have been set up for this  
product.  
Prints a list of phone numbers  
that are blocked from sending  
faxes to this product.  
Prints a list of billing codes that  
have been used for outgoing  
faxes. This report shows how  
many sent faxes were billed to  
each code. This menu item  
appears only when the billing  
codes feature is turned on.  
Print All Fax Reports  
Send Fax Later  
Prints all fax-related reports.  
Send Options  
Allows a fax to be sent at a later  
time and date.  
Broadcast Fax  
Sends a fax to multiple  
recipients.  
32  
Chapter 2 Control panel menus  
ENWW  
     
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Description  
Fax Job Status  
Displays pending fax jobs, and  
allows you to cancel pending fax  
jobs.  
Fax Resolution  
Standard  
Fine  
Sets the resolution for sent  
documents. Higher resolution  
images have more dots per inch  
(dpi), so they show more detail.  
Lower resolution images have  
fewer dots per inch and show  
less detail, but the file size is  
smaller.  
Superfine  
Photo  
Receive Options  
Print Private Faxes  
Prints stored faxes when the  
private-receive feature is on.  
This menu item appears only  
when the private-receive feature  
is turned on. The product  
prompts you for the system  
password.  
Block Junk Faxes  
Add Number  
Modifies the junk fax list. The  
junk fax list can contain up to 30  
numbers. When the product  
receives a call from one of the  
junk fax numbers, it deletes the  
incoming fax. It also logs the  
junk fax in the activity log along  
with job-accounting information.  
Delete Number  
Delete All Numbers  
Print Junk Fax list  
Reprint Faxes  
Prints the received faxes stored  
in available memory. This item  
is available only if you have  
turned on the Allow Fax Reprint  
feature in the Fax Setup menu.  
Forward Fax  
On  
Sets product to send all  
received faxes to another fax  
machine.  
Off*  
Polling Receive  
Allows the product to call  
another fax machine that has  
polling send enabled.  
Phone Book Setup  
Individual Setup  
Group Setup  
Edits the fax phone book speed  
dials and group-dial entries. The  
product supports up to 120  
phone book entries, which can  
be either individual or group  
entries.  
Delete Entry  
Deletes a specific phone book  
entry.  
Delete All Entries  
Deletes all entries in the phone  
book.  
Function specific menus  
ENWW  
33  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Description  
Print Report Now  
Prints a list of all the individual  
and group dial entries in the  
phone book.  
Change Defaults  
Opens the Fax Setup menu.  
Scan menu  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
JPEG  
Description  
Scan to USB Drive  
Scan File Type  
Scans a document and stores it  
as a .PDF file or .JPEG image  
on the USB flash drive.  
NOTE: Touch the Settings...  
PDF  
button to access the sub menus.  
Scan Resolution  
Scan Paper Size  
75 dpi  
Specifies the resolution to use  
for the scanned image.  
150 dpi  
300 dpi  
Scan quality increases with  
higher resolution, but the file  
size also increases.  
Letter  
Specifies the size of the page to  
use for the scanned file.  
Legal  
A4  
Scan Source  
Document Feeder  
Flatbed Scanner  
Specifies whether the scanned  
page is in the document feeder  
or on the scanner glass.  
File Name Prefix  
Output Color  
Provides a way to set a  
standard name prefix for scan  
job files.  
Color  
Specifies whether the scan  
output file will be a color image  
or a monochrome image.  
Black & White  
Set as New Defaults  
Saves any changes you have  
made to this menu as the new  
defaults.  
34  
Chapter 2 Control panel menus  
ENWW  
   
USB Flash Drive  
Menu item  
Description  
Print Documents  
Prints documents stored on the USB drive. Use the arrow  
buttons to scroll through the documents. Touch the names of  
documents that you want to print.  
Touch the summary screen to change settings such as the  
number of copies, the paper size, or the paper type.  
Touch the Print button when you are ready to print the  
documents.  
View and Print Photos  
Scan to USB Drive  
Previews photos on the USB drive. Use the arrow buttons to  
scroll through the photos. Touch the preview image for each  
photo that you want to print. You can adjust the settings, and  
you can save the changes as the new default settings. When  
you are ready to print the photos, touch the Print button.  
Scans a document and stores it as a .PDF file or .JPEG  
image on the USB flash drive.  
Function specific menus  
ENWW  
35  
   
36  
Chapter 2 Control panel menus  
ENWW  
Supported operating systems and printer drivers for  
Windows  
The product supports the following Windows operating systems:  
Recommended software installation  
Print and scan drivers only  
Windows XP (32-bit, Service Pack 2)  
Windows Vista (32-bit and 64-bit)  
Windows 7 (32-bit and 64-bit)  
Windows 2003 Server (32-bit, Service Pack 3)  
Windows 2008 Server  
Windows 2008 Server R2  
The product supports the following Windows printer drivers:  
HP PCL 6 (this is the default printer driver included on the product CD and in the HP Smart  
Install program)  
HP Universal Print Driver for Windows Postscript  
HP Universal Print Driver for PCL 5  
The printer drivers include online Help that has instructions for common printing tasks and also  
describes the buttons, checkboxes, and drop-down lists that are in the printer driver.  
NOTE: For more information about the UPD, see www.hp.com/go/upd.  
Select the correct printer driver for Windows  
Printer drivers provide access to the product features and allow the computer to communicate with  
the product (using a printer language). The following printer drivers are available at www.hp.com/go/  
HP PCL 6 driver  
Provided as the default driver. This driver is automatically installed unless  
you select a different one.  
Recommended for all Windows environments  
Provides the overall best speed, print quality, and product-feature support for  
most users  
Developed to align with the Windows Graphic Device Interface (GDI) for the  
best speed in Windows environments  
Might not be fully compatible with third-party and custom software programs  
that are based on PCL 5  
Recommended for printing with Adobe® software programs or with other  
highly graphics-intensive software programs  
HP UPD PS driver  
Provides support for printing from postscript emulation needs, or for  
postscript flash font support  
38  
Chapter 3 Software for Windows  
ENWW  
     
HP UPD PCL 5  
Recommended for general office printing in Windows environments  
Compatible with previous PCL versions and older HP LaserJet products  
The best choice for printing from third-party or custom software programs  
The best choice when operating with mixed environments, which require the  
product to be set to PCL 5 (UNIX, Linux, mainframe)  
Designed for use in corporate Windows environments to provide a single  
driver for use with multiple printer models  
Preferred when printing to multiple printer models from a mobile Windows  
computer  
HP UPD PCL 6  
Recommended for printing in all Windows environments  
Provides the overall best speed, print quality, and printer feature support for  
most users  
Developed to align with Windows Graphic Device Interface (GDI) for best  
speed in Windows environments  
May not be fully compatible with third-party and custom solutions based on  
PCL5  
Select the correct printer driver for Windows  
ENWW  
39  
HP Universal Print Driver (UPD)  
The HP Universal Print Driver (UPD) for Windows is a single driver that gives you instant access to  
virtually any HP LaserJet product, from any location, without downloading separate drivers. It is built  
on proven HP print driver technology and has been tested thoroughly and used with many software  
programs. It is a powerful solution that performs consistently over time.  
The HP UPD communicates directly with each HP product, gathers configuration information, and  
then customizes the user interface to show the product’s unique, available features. It automatically  
enables features that are available for the product, such as two-sided printing and stapling, so you do  
not need to enable them manually.  
For more information, go to www.hp.com/go/upd.  
UPD installation modes  
Traditional mode  
Use this mode if you are installing the driver from a CD for a single computer.  
When installed from the CD that comes with the product, UPD operates like  
traditional printer drivers. It operates with a specific product.  
If you use this mode, you must install UPD separately for each computer and  
for each product.  
Dynamic mode  
To use this mode, download UPD from the Internet. See www.hp.com/go/  
upd.  
Dynamic mode allows you to use a single driver installation, so you can  
discover and print to HP products in any location.  
Use this mode if you are installing UPD for a workgroup.  
40  
Chapter 3 Software for Windows  
ENWW  
   
Change print job settings for Windows  
Priority for print settings  
Changes to print settings are prioritized depending on where the changes are made:  
NOTE: The names of commands and dialog boxes might vary depending on your software  
program.  
Page Setup dialog box: Click Page Setup or a similar command on the File menu of the  
program you are working in to open this dialog box. Settings changed here override settings  
changed anywhere else.  
Print dialog box: Click Print, Print Setup, or a similar command on the File menu of the  
program you are working in to open this dialog box. Settings changed in the Print dialog box  
have a lower priority and usually do not override changes made in the Page Setup dialog box.  
Printer Properties dialog box (printer driver): Click Properties in the Print dialog box to open  
the printer driver. Settings changed in the Printer Properties dialog box usually do not override  
settings anywhere else in the printing software. You can change most of the print settings here.  
Default printer driver settings: The default printer driver settings determine the settings used  
in all print jobs, unless settings are changed in the Page Setup, Print, or Printer Properties  
dialog boxes.  
Printer control panel settings: Settings changed at the printer control panel have a lower  
priority than changes made anywhere else.  
Change the settings for all print jobs until the software program is closed  
1. On the File menu in the software program, click Print.  
2. Select the driver, and then click Properties or Preferences.  
The steps can vary; this procedure is most common.  
Change the default settings for all print jobs  
1. Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows Server 2008 (using the default Start  
menu view): Click Start, and then click Printers and Faxes.  
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows Server 2008 (using the Classic Start  
menu view): Click Start, click Settings, and then click Printers.  
Windows Vista: Click Start, click Control Panel, and then in the category for Hardware and  
Sound click Printer.  
Windows 7: Click Start, and then click Devices and Printers.  
2. Right-click the driver icon, and then select Printing Preferences.  
Change print job settings for Windows  
ENWW  
41  
           
Change the product configuration settings  
1. Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows Server 2008 (using the default Start  
menu view): Click Start, and then click Printers and Faxes.  
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows Server 2008 (using the Classic Start  
menu view): Click Start, click Settings, and then click Printers.  
Windows Vista: Click Start, click Control Panel, and then in the category for Hardware and  
Sound click Printer.  
Windows 7: Click Start, and then click Devices and Printers.  
2. Right-click the driver icon, and then select Properties or Printer properties.  
3. Click the Device Settings tab.  
42  
Chapter 3 Software for Windows  
ENWW  
 
Remove the printer driver from Windows  
Windows XP  
1. Click the Start button, , and then click the Printers and Faxes item.  
2. Find and right-click the product from the list, and then click the Delete item.  
3. From the File menu, click the Server Properties item. The Print Server Properties dialog box  
opens.  
4. Click the Drivers tab, and in the list, select the driver to be removed.  
5. Click the Remove button, and then click the Yes button to confirm the removal.  
Windows Vista  
1. Click the Start button , and then click the Control Panel item.  
2. In the Hardware and Sound group, click the Printer item.  
3. Find and right-click the product, click the Delete item, and then click the Yes button to confirm  
the removal.  
4. From the File menu, click the Server Properties item. The Print Server Properties dialog box  
opens.  
5. Click the Drivers tab, and in the list, select the driver to be removed.  
6. Click the Remove button, and then click the Yes button to confirm the removal.  
Windows 7  
1. Click the Start button, and then click the Devices and Printers item.  
2. Find and select the product from the list.  
3. Click the Remove device button at the top of the dialog box, and then click the Yes button to  
confirm the removal.  
4. Click the Print server properties button at the top of the dialog box, and then click the Drivers  
tab.  
5. Select the product in the list, and then click the Remove button.  
6. Select to delete only the driver and or the driver software package, and then click the OK button  
Remove the printer driver from Windows  
ENWW  
43  
   
Supported utilities for Windows  
HP Web Jetadmin  
HP Embedded Web Server  
HP ePrint  
Other Windows components and utilities  
HP Smart Install — automates the printing system installation  
Online Web registration  
HP LaserJet Scan  
PC Fax Send  
HP Device Toolbox  
HP Uninstall  
HP Help & Learn Center  
Reconfigure your HP device  
HP Fax Setup Wizard  
HP LaserJet Customer Participation Program  
Software for other operating systems  
OS  
Software  
UNIX  
For HP-UX and Solaris networks, go to www.hp.com/support/net_printing to download  
the HP Jetdirect printer installer for UNIX.  
For Unix print drivers, go to www.hp.com/pond/modelscripts/index2.  
For information, go to www.hp.com/go/linuxprinting.  
Linux  
44  
Chapter 3 Software for Windows  
ENWW  
               
Software for Mac  
Supported operating systems and printer drivers for Mac  
The product supports the following Mac operating systems:  
Mac OS X 10.5 and 10.6  
NOTE: For Mac OS X 10.5 and later, PPC and Intel® Core™ Processor Macs are supported. For  
Mac OS X 10.6, Intel Core Processor Macs are supported.  
The HP LaserJet software installer provides PostScript® Printer Description (PPD) files, Printer Dialog  
Extensions (PDEs), and the HP Utility for use with Mac OS X computers. The HP printer PPD and  
PDE files, in combination with the built-in Apple PostScript printer drivers, provide full printing  
functionality and access to specific HP printer features.  
Install software for Mac operating systems  
Install software for Mac computers connected directly to the product  
This product supports a USB 2.0 connection. Use an A-to-B type USB cable. HP recommends using  
a cable that is no longer than 2 m (6.5 ft).  
1. Connect the USB cable to the product and the computer.  
2. Install the software from the CD.  
3. Click HP Installer icon, and follow the onscreen instructions.  
4. On the Congratulations screen, click the OK button.  
5. Print a page from any program to make sure that the printing software is correctly installed.  
46  
Chapter 4 Use the product with Mac  
ENWW  
         
Install software for Mac computers on a wired network  
Configure the IP address  
1. Connect the network cable to the product and to the network.  
2. Wait for 60 seconds before continuing. During this time, the network recognizes the product and  
assigns an IP address or host name for the product.  
Install the software  
1. Install the software from the CD. Click the product icon, and follow the onscreen instructions.  
2. Print a page from any program to make sure that the software is correctly installed.  
Software for Mac  
ENWW  
47  
 
Install software for Mac computers on a wireless network  
Before installing the product software, make sure the product is not connected to the network using a  
network cable. Make sure your Mac computer is connected to the same wireless network to which  
you plan to connect the product.  
Use one of the following procedures to connect the product to the wireless network.  
If your router supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS), use that method to add the product to your  
network. This is the simplest way to set up the product on a wireless network.  
NOTE: Apple AirPort wireless routers do not support WPS button setup.  
If your wireless router does not support Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS), obtain the wireless router  
network settings from your system administrator, or complete the following tasks:  
Obtain the wireless network name or service set identifier (SSID).  
Determine the security password or encryption key for the wireless network.  
Connect the product to a wireless network using WPS by using the control panel menus  
1. On the front of the product, press the Wireless button. Look at the control panel display to see if  
the Wireless Menu item has opened. If it has not opened, complete these steps:  
a. At the control panel, press the OK button to open the menus.  
b. Open the following menus:  
Network Setup  
Wireless Menu  
2. Select the Wi-Fi Protected Setup item.  
3. Use one of these methods to complete the setup:  
Pushbutton: Select the Pushbutton option and follow the instructions on the control panel.  
Establishing the wireless connection can take a few minutes.  
PIN: Select the Generate PIN option. The product generates a unique PIN, which you must  
type into the wireless router's setup screen. Establishing the wireless connection can take a  
few minutes.  
4. At the computer, open the Apple menu , click the System Preferences menu, and then click  
the Print & Fax icon.  
48  
Chapter 4 Use the product with Mac  
ENWW  
   
5. Click the plus (+) symbol in the lower left corner of the Printer Names column.  
By default, Mac OS X uses the Bonjour method to find the product over the local network and  
add it to the printer pop-up menu. This method is best in most situations. If Mac OS X cannot  
find the HP printer driver, an error message displays. Reinstall the software.  
6. Print a page from any program to make sure that the software is correctly installed.  
NOTE: If this method is not successful, try using the wireless network using a USB cable method.  
Connect the product to a wireless network using a USB cable  
If your wireless router does not support WiFi-Protected Setup (WPS), use this method to set up the  
product on a wireless network. Using a USB cable to transfer settings makes setting up a wireless  
connection easier. After the setup is complete, you can disconnect the USB cable and use the  
wireless connection.  
1. Insert the software CD into the computer CD tray.  
2. Follow the on-screen instructions. When prompted, select the Configure your device for a  
wireless network option. Connect the USB cable to the product when prompted.  
CAUTION: Do not connect the USB cable until the installation program prompts you.  
3. When the installation is complete, print a configuration page to make sure that the product has a  
SSID name.  
4. Print a page from any program to make sure that the software is correctly installed.  
Remove the printer driver from Mac operating systems  
You must have administrator rights to remove the software.  
1. Open System Preferences.  
2. Select Print & Fax.  
3. Highlight the product.  
4. Click the minus (-) symbol.  
5. Click the Delete Printer button to remove the print queue.  
NOTE: If you want to remove all the software associated with the project, use the HP Uninstaller  
utility in the Hewlett-Packard program group.  
Priority for print settings for Mac  
Changes to print settings are prioritized depending on where the changes are made:  
Software for Mac  
ENWW  
49  
           
NOTE: The names of commands and dialog boxes might vary depending on your software  
program.  
Page Setup dialog box: Click Page Setup or a similar command on the File menu of the  
program you are working in to open this dialog box. Settings changed here might override  
settings changed anywhere else.  
Print dialog box: Click Print, Print Setup, or a similar command on the File menu of the  
program you are working in to open this dialog box. Settings changed in the Print dialog box  
have a lower priority and do not override changes made in the Page Setup dialog box.  
Default printer driver settings: The default printer driver settings determine the settings used  
in all print jobs, unless settings are changed in the Page Setup, Print, or Printer Properties  
dialog boxes.  
Printer control panel settings: Settings changed at the printer control panel have a lower  
priority than changes made anywhere else.  
Change printer-driver settings for Mac  
Change the settings for all print jobs until the software program is closed  
1. On the File menu, click the Print button.  
2. Change the settings that you want on the various menus.  
Change the default settings for all print jobs  
1. On the File menu, click the Print button.  
2. Change the settings that you want on the various menus.  
3. On the Presets menu, click the Save As... option and type a name for the preset.  
These settings are saved in the Presets menu. To use the new settings, you must select the saved  
preset option every time you open a program and print.  
Change the product configuration settings  
1. From the Apple menu , click the System Preferences menu and then click the Print & Fax  
icon.  
2. Select the product in the left side of the window.  
3. Click the Options & Supplies button.  
4. Click the Driver tab.  
5. Configure the installed options.  
50  
Chapter 4 Use the product with Mac  
ENWW  
   
Software for Mac computers  
HP Utility for Mac  
Use the HP Utility to set up product features that are not available in the printer driver.  
You can use the HP Utility when the product uses a universal serial bus (USB) cable or is connected  
to a TCP/IP-based network.  
Open the HP Utility  
From the dock, click HP Utility.  
-or-  
From Applications, open the Hewlett-Packard folder, and then click HP Utility.  
HP Utility features  
Use the HP Utility software to perform the following tasks:  
Obtain information about supplies status.  
Obtain information about the product, such as the firmware version and the serial number.  
Print a configuration page.  
For products connected to an IP-based network, obtain network information and open the  
HP Embedded Web Server.  
Configure the paper type and size for the tray.  
Transfer files and fonts from the computer to the product.  
Update the product firmware.  
Display the color usage page.  
Configure basic fax settings.  
Supported utilities for Mac  
HP Embedded Web Server  
The product is equipped with the HP Embedded Web server, which provides access to information  
about product and network activities. Access the HP Embedded Web Server from the HP Utility.  
Open the Printer Settings menu, and then select the Additional Settings option.  
Software for Mac  
ENWW  
51  
         
You can also access the HP Embedded Web Server from the Safari Web browser:  
1. Select the page icon in the left side of the Safari toolbar.  
2. Click the Bonjour logo.  
3. In the list of printers, double-click this product. The HP Embedded Web Server opens.  
HP ePrint  
With HP ePrint , you can print anywhere, anytime, from a mobile phone, laptop, or any other mobile  
device. HP ePrint works with any email-capable device. If you can e-mail, you can print to an  
HP ePrint-enabled product. For more details, go to www.hpeprintcenter.com.  
NOTE: The product must be connected to a network and have Internet access to use HP ePrint.  
HP ePrint is disabled as a default setting in the product. Use this procedure to enable it.  
1. Type the product IP address into the address line of a Web browser to open the HP Embedded  
Web Server.  
2. Click the HP Web Services tab.  
3. Select the option to enable Web Services.  
AirPrint  
Direct printing using Apple’s AirPrint is supported for iOS 4.2 or later. Use AirPrint to print directly to  
the product from an iPad (iOS 4.2), iPhone (3GS or later), or iPod touch (third generation or later) in  
the following applications:  
Mail  
Photos  
Safari  
Select third-party applications  
To use AirPrint, the product must be connected to a wireless network. For more information about  
using AirPrint and about which HP products are compatible with AirPrint, go to www.hp.com/go/  
NOTE: You might need to upgrade the product firmware to use AirPrint. Go to www.hp.com/go/  
52  
Chapter 4 Use the product with Mac  
ENWW  
   
Basic print tasks with Mac  
Cancel a print job with Mac  
1. If the print job is currently printing, cancel it by pressing the Cancel  
button on the product  
control panel.  
NOTE: Pressing the Cancel  
button clears the job that the product is currently processing. If  
more than one process is running, pressing the Cancel  
currently appears on the product control panel.  
button clears the process that  
2. You can also cancel a print job from a software program or a print queue.  
Software program: Typically, a dialog box appears briefly on the computer screen,  
allowing you to cancel the print job.  
Mac print queue: Open the print queue by double-clicking the product icon in the dock.  
Highlight the print job, and then click Delete.  
Change the paper size and type with Mac  
1. On the File menu in the software program, click the Print option.  
2. In the Copies & Pages menu, click the Page Setup button.  
3. Select a size from the Paper Size drop-down list, and then click the OK button.  
4. Open the Finishing menu.  
5. Select a type from the Media-type drop-down list.  
6. Click the Print button.  
Resize documents or print on a custom paper size with Mac  
Mac OS X 10.5 and 10.6  
1. On the File menu, click the Print option.  
2. Click the Page Setup button.  
Use one of these methods.  
3. Select the product, and then select the correct settings for the Paper Size  
and Orientation options.  
1. On the File menu, click the Print option.  
2. Open the Paper Handling menu.  
3. In the Destination Paper Size area, click the Scale to fit paper size box,  
and then select the size from the drop-down list.  
Create and use printing presets with Mac  
Use printing presets to save the current printer driver settings for reuse.  
Basic print tasks with Mac  
ENWW  
53  
                 
Create a printing preset  
1. On the File menu, click the Print option.  
2. Select the driver.  
3. Select the print settings that you want to save for reuse.  
4. In the Presets menu, click the Save As... option, and type a name for the preset.  
5. Click the OK button.  
Use printing presets  
1. On the File menu, click the Print option.  
2. Select the driver.  
3. In the Presets menu, select the printing preset.  
NOTE: To use printer-driver default settings, select the standard option.  
Print a cover page with Mac  
1. On the File menu, click the Print option.  
2. Select the driver.  
3. Open the Cover Page menu, and then select where to print the cover page. Click either the  
Before Document button or the After Document button.  
4. In the Cover Page Type menu, select the message that you want to print on the cover page.  
NOTE: To print a blank cover page, select the standard option from the Cover Page Type  
menu.  
Use watermarks with Mac  
1. On the File menu, click the Print option.  
2. Open the Watermarks menu.  
3. From the Mode menu, select the type of watermark to use. Select the Watermark option to print  
a semi-transparent message. Select the Overlay option to print a message that is not  
transparent.  
4. From the Pages menu, select whether to print the watermark on all pages or on the first page  
only.  
5. From the Text menu, select one of the standard messages, or select the Custom option and  
type a new message in the box.  
6. Select options for the remaining settings.  
54  
Chapter 4 Use the product with Mac  
ENWW  
       
Print multiple pages on one sheet of paper with Mac  
1. On the File menu, click the Print option.  
2. Select the driver.  
3. Open the Layout menu.  
4. From the Pages per Sheet menu, select the number of pages that you want to print on each  
sheet (1, 2, 4, 6, 9, or 16).  
5. In the Layout Direction area, select the order and placement of the pages on the sheet.  
6. From the Borders menu, select the type of border to print around each page on the sheet.  
Print on both sides of the page (duplex printing) with Mac  
Use automatic duplex printing  
1. Insert enough paper into one of the trays to accommodate the print job.  
2. On the File menu, click the Print option.  
3. Open the Layout menu.  
4. From the Two-Sided menu, select a binding option.  
Print on both sides manually  
1. Insert enough paper into one of the trays to accommodate the print job.  
2. On the File menu, click the Print option.  
3. Open the Finishing menu, and click the Manual Duplex tab or open the Manual Duplex menu.  
4. Click the Manual Duplex box, and select a binding option.  
5. Click the Print button. Follow the instructions in the pop-up window that appears on the  
computer screen before replacing the output stack in Tray 1 for printing the second half.  
Basic print tasks with Mac  
ENWW  
55  
       
6. Go to the product, and remove any blank paper that is in Tray 1.  
7. Insert the printed stack face-up with the bottom edge feeding into the printer first in Tray 1. You  
must print the second side from Tray 1.  
8. If prompted, press the appropriate control-panel button to continue.  
Set the color options with Mac  
If you are using the HP Postscript printer driver for Mac, HP EasyColor technology scans all  
documents and automatically adjusts all photographic images with the same improved photographic  
results.  
In the following example, the images on the left were created without using the HP EasyColor option.  
The images on the right show the enhancements that result from using the HP EasyColor option.  
The HP EasyColor option is enabled by default in the HP Mac Postscript printer driver, so you do not  
need to make manual color adjustments. To disable the option so you can manually adjust the color  
settings, use the following procedure.  
1. On the File menu, click the Print option.  
2. Select the driver.  
3. Open the Color/Quality Options menu, and then click the HP EasyColor check box to clear it.  
4. Open the Advanced menu, or select the appropriate tab.  
5. Adjust the individual settings for text, graphics, and photographs.  
56  
Chapter 4 Use the product with Mac  
ENWW  
   
Use AirPrint  
Direct printing using Apple’s AirPrint is supported for iOS 4.2 or later. Use AirPrint to print directly to  
the product from an iPad (iOS 4.2), iPhone (3GS or later), or iPod touch (third generation or later) in  
the following applications:  
Mail  
Photos  
Safari  
Select third-party applications  
To use AirPrint, the product must be connected to a network. For more information about using  
AirPrint and about which HP products are compatible with AirPrint, go to www.hp.com/go/airprint.  
NOTE: You might need to upgrade the product firmware to use AirPrint. Go to www.hp.com/go/  
Use AirPrint  
ENWW  
57  
   
Fax with Mac  
To send a fax by printing to a fax driver, complete the following steps:  
1. Open the document that you want to fax.  
2. Click File and then click Print.  
3. In the Printer pop-up menu, select the fax print queue that you want to use.  
4. In the Copies field, adjust the number of copies if necessary.  
5. In the Paper Size pop-up menu, adjust the paper size if necessary.  
6. In the Fax Information area, enter the fax number of one or more recipients.  
NOTE: If you need to include a dialing prefix, enter it in the Dialing Prefix field.  
7. Click Fax.  
58  
Chapter 4 Use the product with Mac  
ENWW  
   
Scan with Mac  
Use the HP Scan software to scan images to a Mac computer.  
1. Load the document onto the scanner glass or into the document feeder.  
2. Open the Applications folder, and then click Hewlett-Packard. Double-click HP Scan.  
3. Open the HP Scan menu and click Preferences. From the Scanner pop-up menu, select this  
product from the list, and click Continue.  
4. To use the standard preset settings, which produce acceptable results for images and text, click  
the Scan button.  
To use presets optimized for pictures or text documents, select a preset from the Scanning  
Presets pop-up menu. To adjust the settings, click the Edit button. When you are ready to scan,  
click the Scan button.  
5. To scan more pages, load the next page and click Scan. Click Append to List to add the new  
pages to the current list. Repeat until you have scanned all the pages.  
6. Click the Save button, and then browse to the folder on your computer where you want to save  
the file.  
NOTE: To print the scanned images now, click the Print button.  
Scan with Mac  
ENWW  
59  
   
Solve problems with Mac  
For information about solving problems with a Mac, see Solve product software problems with Mac  
60  
Chapter 4 Use the product with Mac  
ENWW  
 
Printer sharing disclaimer  
HP does not support peer-to-peer networking, as the feature is a function of Microsoft operating  
systems and not of the HP printer drivers. Go to Microsoft at www.microsoft.com.  
Use HP Smart Install to connect to a computer, a wired  
network, or a wireless network  
The software installation files are in the product memory. The HP Smart Install program uses a USB  
cable to transfer the installation files from the product to your computer. This installer supports USB  
connections, wired networks, and wireless networks. It installs all files you need to print, copy, scan,  
and fax. To use the HP Smart Install program, follow one of these procedures, depending on your  
connection type.  
NOTE: If you prefer not to use the HP Smart Install program, you can insert the product CD to  
install the software.  
HP Smart Install for Windows direct connections (USB)  
1. Turn the product on.  
2. Connect an A-to-B type USB cable to the computer and the product. The HP Smart Install  
program might take a few minutes to start.  
3. The HP Smart Install program should start automatically. Follow the onscreen instructions to  
install the software.  
NOTE: The HP Smart Install program might take a few minutes to start. If the HP Smart Install  
program does not start automatically, AutoPlay might be disabled on the computer. Browse the  
computer and double-click the HP Smart Install drive to run the program.  
NOTE: If the HP Smart Install program fails, disconnect the USB cable, turn the product off  
and then on again, and then insert the product CD into your computer. Follow the onscreen  
instructions. Connect the cable only when the software prompts you.  
HP Smart Install for Windows wired networks  
1. Connect a network cable to the product and a network port. Allow a few minutes for an IP  
address to be assigned.  
2.  
On the product control panel, touch the network  
button to display the product IP address.  
3. At the computer, open a Web browser and type the IP address in the URL address bar to open  
the HP Embedded Web Server. Click the HP Smart Install tab and follow the onscreen  
instructions.  
NOTE: If the HP Smart Install program fails, insert the product CD into your computer. Follow the  
onscreen instructions.  
62  
Chapter 5 Connect the product with Windows  
ENWW  
       
HP Smart Install for Windows wireless networks, method 1: Use the  
product control panel  
NOTE: Use this method only if you know your wireless network SSID and password.  
1. On the product control panel, touch the Wireless  
button. Touch the Wireless Menu button,  
and then touch the Wireless Setup Wizard item. Follow the instructions to complete the wireless  
setup.  
2. On the product control panel, touch the wireless status  
button to display the product IP  
address.  
3. At the computer, open a Web browser and type the IP address in the URL address bar to open  
the HP Embedded Web Server. Click the HP Smart Install tab and follow the onscreen  
instructions.  
HP Smart Install for Windows wireless networks, method 2: Temporarily  
connect a USB cable  
1. Connect an A-to-B type USB cable to the computer and the product. The HP Smart Install  
program might take a few minutes to start.  
2. Follow the onscreen instructions. Choose the Wireless Network option for the installation type.  
Remove the USB cable when instructed.  
HP Smart Install for Windows wireless networks, method 3: Use WPS  
1. On the product control panel, touch the Wireless  
button. Touch the Wireless Menu button,  
and then touch the Wi-Fi Protected Setup item. Follow the instructions to complete the wireless  
setup.  
2. On the product control panel, touch the wireless status  
button to display the product IP  
address.  
3. At the computer, open a Web browser and type the IP address in the URL address bar to open  
the HP Embedded Web Server. Click the HP Smart Install tab and follow the onscreen  
instructions.  
Use HP Smart Install to connect to a computer, a wired network, or a wireless network  
ENWW  
63  
     
Connect with USB  
NOTE: Use this procedure if you are not using the HP Smart Install.  
This product supports a USB 2.0 connection. Use an A-to-B type USB cable. HP recommends using  
a cable that is no longer than 2 m (6.5 ft).  
CAUTION: Do not connect the USB cable until the installation software prompts you to connect it.  
CD installation  
1. Quit all open programs on the computer.  
2. Install the software from the CD, and follow the onscreen instructions.  
3. When prompted, select the Directly connect to this computer using a USB cable option, and  
then click the Next button.  
4. When the software prompts you, connect the USB cable to the product and the computer.  
5. At the end of the installation, click the Finish button.  
6. On the More Options screen, you can install more software, or click the Finish button.  
7. Print a page from any program to make sure that the printing software is correctly installed.  
64  
Chapter 5 Connect the product with Windows  
ENWW  
       
Connect to a network with Windows  
Supported network protocols  
To connect a networking-equipped product to a network, you need a network that uses one or more  
of the following protocols.  
TCP/IP (IPv4 or IPv6)  
LPD Printing  
SLP  
WS-Discovery  
Install the product on a wired network with Windows  
NOTE: Use this procedure if you are not using the HP Smart Install.  
Obtain the IP address  
1. Connect the network cable to the product and to the network. Turn the product on.  
2. Wait for 60 seconds before continuing. During this time, the network recognizes the product and  
assigns an IP address or host name for the product.  
3.  
At the product control panel, press the Setup  
button.  
4. Touch the Reports menu, and then touch the Configuration Report button to print the  
configuration report.  
Connect to a network with Windows  
ENWW  
65  
         
5. Find the IP address on the configuration report.  
Jetdirect Page  
HP Color LaserJet  
Page 1  
Install the software  
1. Quit all programs on the computer.  
2. Install the software from the CD.  
3. Follow the onscreen instructions.  
4. When prompted, select the Connect through a wired network option, and then click the Next  
button.  
5. From the list of available printers, select the printer that has the correct IP address.  
6. Click the Finish button.  
7. On the More Options screen, you can install more software, or click the Finish button.  
8. Print a page from any program to make sure that the printing software is correctly installed.  
Install the product on a wireless network with Windows (wireless models  
only)  
NOTE: Use this procedure if you are not using the HP Smart Install.  
Before installing the product software, make sure the product is not connected to the network using a  
network cable.  
If your wireless router does not support Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS), obtain the wireless router  
network settings from your system administrator, or complete the following tasks:  
Obtain the wireless network name or service set identifier (SSID).  
Determine the security password or encryption key for the wireless network.  
66  
Chapter 5 Connect the product with Windows  
ENWW  
     
Connect the product to a wireless network using WPS  
If your wireless router supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS), this is the simplest way to set up the  
product on a wireless network.  
1. From the Home screen on the product control panel, touch the Wireless button.  
2. Touch the Wireless Menu button, and then touch the Wi-Fi Protected Setup button.  
3. Use one of these methods to complete the setup:  
Pushbutton: Select the Pushbutton option and follow the instructions on the control panel.  
Establishing the wireless connection can take a few minutes.  
PIN: Select the Generate PIN option and follow the instructions on the control panel. The  
product generates a unique PIN, which you must type into the wireless router's setup  
screen. Establishing the wireless connection can take a few minutes.  
NOTE: If this method is not successful, try using the Wireless Setup Wizard on the product control  
panel or try using the USB cable connection method.  
Connect the product to a wireless network using the Wireless Setup Wizard  
If your wireless router does not support WiFi-Protected Setup (WPS), you can use this method to  
install the product on a wireless network.  
1. From the Home screen on the product control panel, touch the Wireless button.  
2. Touch the Wireless Menu button, and then touch the Wireless Setup Wizard button.  
3. The product scans for available wireless networks and returns a list of network names (SSIDs).  
Select the SSID for your wireless router from the list if it is available. If the SSID for your wireless  
router is not in the list, touch the Enter SSID button. When prompted for the type of network  
security, select the option that your wireless router uses. A keypad opens on the control panel  
display.  
4. If your wireless router uses WPA security, type the passphrase on the keypad.  
If your wireless router uses WEP security, type the key on the keypad.  
5. Touch the OK button, and wait while the product establishes a connection with the wireless  
router. Establishing the wireless connection can take a few minutes.  
Connect the product to a wireless network using a USB cable  
If your wireless router does not support WiFi-Protected Setup (WPS), use this method to set up the  
product on a wireless network. Using a USB cable to transfer settings makes setting up a wireless  
Connect to a network with Windows  
ENWW  
67  
     
connection easier. After the setup is complete, you can disconnect the USB cable and use the  
wireless connection.  
1. Insert the software CD into the computer CD tray.  
2. Follow the on-screen instructions. When prompted, select the Connect through a wireless  
network option. Connect the USB cable to the product when prompted.  
CAUTION: Do not connect the USB cable until the installation program prompts you.  
3. When the installation is complete, print a configuration page to make sure that the product has a  
SSID name.  
4. When installation is complete, disconnect the USB cable.  
Install the software for a wireless product currently on the network  
If the product already has an IP address on a wireless network and you want to install product  
software on a computer, complete the following steps.  
1. From the product control panel, print a configuration page to obtain the product IP address.  
2. Install the software from the CD.  
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
4. When prompted, select the Connect through a wireless network option, and then click the  
Next button.  
5. From the list of available printers, select the printer that has the correct IP address.  
Configure IP network settings with Windows  
View or change network settings  
Use the embedded Web server to view or change IP configuration settings.  
1. Print a configuration page, and locate the IP address.  
If you are using IPv4, the IP address contains only digits. It has this format:  
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx  
If you are using IPv6, the IP address is a hexadecimal combination of characters and digits.  
It has a format similar to this:  
xxxx::xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx  
2. To open the HP Embedded Web Server, type the IP address (IPv4) into the address line of a  
Web browser. For IPv6, use the protocol established by the Web browser for entering IPv6  
addresses.  
3. Click the Networking tab to obtain network information. You can change settings as needed.  
68  
Chapter 5 Connect the product with Windows  
ENWW  
     
Set or change the product password  
Use the HP Embedded Web Server to set a password or change an existing password for a product  
on a network.  
1. Type the product IP address into the address line of a Web browser. Click the Networking tab,  
and click the Security link.  
NOTE: If a password has previously been set, you are prompted to type the password. Type  
the password, and then click the Apply button.  
2. Type the new password in the New Password box and in the Verify password box.  
3. At the bottom of the window, click the Apply button to save the password.  
Manually configure IPv4 TCP/IP parameters from the control panel  
Use the control-panel menus to manually set an IPv4 address, subnet mask, and default gateway.  
1.  
Touch the Setup  
button.  
2. Scroll to and touch the Network Setup menu.  
3. Touch the TCP/IP Config menu, and then touch the Manual button.  
4. Use the numeric keypad to enter the IP address, and touch the OK button. Touch the Yes button  
to confirm.  
5. Use the numeric keypad to enter the subnet mask, and touch the OK button. Touch the Yes  
button to confirm.  
6. Use the numeric keypad to enter the default gateway, and touch the OK button. Touch the Yes  
button to confirm.  
Connect to a network with Windows  
ENWW  
69  
   
Link speed and duplex settings  
NOTE: This information applies only to Ethernet networks. It does not apply to wireless networks.  
The link speed and communication mode of the print server must match the network hub. For most  
situations, leave the product in automatic mode. Incorrect changes to the link speed and duplex  
settings might prevent the product from communicating with other network devices. If you need to  
make changes, use the product control panel.  
NOTE: The setting must match with the network product to which you are connecting (a network  
hub, switch, gateway, router, or computer).  
NOTE: Making changes to these settings causes the product to turn off and then on. Make changes  
only when the product is idle.  
1.  
Touch the Setup  
button.  
2. Scroll to and touch the Network Setup menu.  
3. Touch the Link Speed menu.  
4. Select one of the following options.  
Setting  
Description  
Automatic  
The print server automatically configures itself for the highest link speed and  
communication mode allowed on the network.  
10T Half  
10 megabytes per second (Mbps), half-duplex operation  
10 Mbps, full-duplex operation  
10T Full  
100TX Half  
100TX Full  
100 Mbps, half-duplex operation  
100 Mbps, full-duplex operation  
5. Touch the OK button. The product turns off and then on.  
70  
Chapter 5 Connect the product with Windows  
ENWW  
 
Understand paper use  
This product supports a variety of paper and other print media. Paper or print media that does not  
meet the following guidelines might cause poor print quality, increased jams, and premature wear on  
the product.  
It is possible for paper to meet all of these guidelines and still not produce satisfactory results. This  
might be the result of improper handling, unacceptable temperature and/or humidity levels, or other  
variables over which Hewlett-Packard has no control.  
CAUTION: Using paper or print media that does not meet Hewlett-Packard's specifications might  
cause problems for the product, requiring repair. This repair is not covered by the Hewlett-Packard  
warranty or service agreements.  
For best results, use only HP-brand paper and print media designed for laser printers or  
multiuse.  
Do not use paper or print media made for inkjet printers.  
CAUTION: HP LaserJet products use fusers to bond dry toner particles to the paper in very  
precise dots. HP laser paper is designed to withstand this extreme heat. Using inkjet paper could  
damage the product.  
Hewlett-Packard Company cannot recommend the use of other brands of media because HP  
cannot control their quality.  
Use the following guidelines to obtain satisfactory results when using special paper or print media.  
Set the paper type and size in the printer driver to obtain the best results.  
Media type  
Do  
Do not  
Envelopes  
Store envelopes flat.  
Do not use envelopes that are  
wrinkled, nicked, stuck together, or  
otherwise damaged.  
Use envelopes where the seam  
extends all the way to the corner  
of the envelope.  
Do not use envelopes that have  
clasps, snaps, windows, or coated  
linings.  
Use peel-off adhesive strips that  
are approved for use in laser  
printers.  
Do not use self-stick adhesives or  
other synthetic materials.  
Labels  
Use only labels that have no  
Do not use labels that have  
wrinkles or bubbles, or are  
damaged.  
exposed backing between them.  
Use labels that lie flat.  
Do not print partial sheets of  
labels.  
Use only full sheets of labels.  
Transparencies  
Use only transparencies that are  
approved for use in color laser  
printers.  
Do not use transparent print media  
not approved for laser printers.  
Place transparencies on a flat  
surface after removing them from  
the product.  
72  
Chapter 6 Paper and print media  
ENWW  
 
Media type  
Do  
Do not  
Letterhead or preprinted forms  
Use only letterhead or forms  
Do not use raised or metallic  
approved for use in laser printers.  
letterhead.  
Heavy paper  
Use only heavy paper that is  
approved for use in laser printers  
and meets the weight  
Do not use paper that is heavier  
than the recommended media  
specification for this product  
unless it is HP paper that has  
been approved for use in this  
product.  
specifications for this product.  
Glossy or coated paper  
Use only glossy or coated paper  
that is approved for use in laser  
printers.  
Do not use glossy or coated paper  
designed for use in inkjet products.  
Understand paper use  
ENWW  
73  
Change the printer driver to match the paper type and  
size in Windows  
1. On the File menu in the software program, click Print.  
2. Select the product, and then click the Properties or Preferences button.  
3. Click the Paper/Quality tab.  
4. Select a size from the Paper size drop-down list.  
5. Select a paper type from the Paper type drop-down list.  
6. Click the OK button.  
74  
Chapter 6 Paper and print media  
ENWW  
   
Supported paper sizes  
NOTE: To obtain best print results, select the appropriate paper size and type in your print driver  
before printing.  
Table 6-1 Supported paper and print media sizes  
Size  
Dimensions  
Tray 1  
Tray 2 or optional  
Tray 3  
Automatic duplex  
printing  
Letter  
Legal  
A4  
216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 inches)  
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)  
210 x 297 mm (8.27 x 11.69 inches)  
184 x 267 mm (7.24 x 10.51 inches)  
148 x 210 mm (5.83 x 8.27 inches)  
105 x 148 mm (4.13 x 5.83 inches)  
182 x 257 mm (7.17 x 10.12 inches)  
Executive  
A5  
A6  
B5 (JIS)  
16k  
184 x 260 mm (7.24 x 10.23 inches)  
195 x 270 mm (7.68 x 10.62 inches)  
197 x 273 mm (7.75 x 10.75 inches)  
216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 inches)  
8.5 x 13  
4 x 6  
107 x 152 mm (4 x 6 inches)  
127 x 203 mm (5 x 8 inches)  
100 x 150 mm (3.9 x 5.9 inches)  
5 x 8  
10 x 15 cm  
Custom  
Minimum: 76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 in)  
Maximum: 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in)  
Minimum: 102 x 153 mm (4 x 6 in)  
Maximum: 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in)  
Custom  
Table 6-2 Supported envelopes and postcards  
Size  
Dimensions  
Tray 1  
Tray 2  
Automatic duplex  
printing  
Envelope #10  
Envelope DL  
Envelope C5  
105 x 241 mm (4.13 x 9.49 inches)  
110 x 220 mm (4.33 x 8.66 inches)  
162 x 229 mm (6.93 x 9.84 inches)  
Supported paper sizes  
ENWW  
75  
   
Table 6-2 Supported envelopes and postcards (continued)  
Size  
Dimensions  
Tray 1  
Tray 2  
Automatic duplex  
printing  
Envelope B5  
176 x 250 mm (6.7 x 9.8 inches)  
98 x 191 mm (3.9 x 7.5 inches)  
Envelope  
Monarch  
Postcard  
100 x 148 mm (3.94 x 5.83 inches)  
148 x 200 mm (5.83 x 7.87 inches)  
Double  
postcard  
76  
Chapter 6 Paper and print media  
ENWW  
Supported paper types and tray capacity  
Table 6-3 Tray 1  
Paper type  
Weight  
Capacity1  
Paper orientation  
60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb)  
Every day:  
Up to 50 sheets  
Side to be printed on face-up,  
with the top edge at the back of  
the tray  
Plain  
Light  
Bond  
Recycled  
,
,
,
Up to 176 g/m2 (47 lb)2  
Up to 176 g/m2 (47 lb)2  
Up to 176 g/m2 (47 lb)2  
Presentation:  
Up to 5 mm (0.2 in) stack height Side to be printed on face-up,  
with the top edge at the back of  
the tray  
Matte paper, mid-weight to  
heavy  
Glossy paper, mid-weight  
to heavy  
Brochure:  
Up to 5 mm (0.2 in) stack height Side to be printed on face-up,  
with the top edge at the back of  
the tray  
Matte paper, mid-weight to  
heavy  
Glossy paper, mid-weight  
to heavy  
Photo/cover  
Up to 5 mm (0.2 in) stack height Side to be printed on face-up,  
with the top edge at the back of  
the tray  
Matte cover paper  
Glossy cover paper  
Matte photo paper  
Glossy photo paper  
Postcard  
Cardstock  
Supported paper types and tray capacity  
ENWW  
77  
 
Table 6-3 Tray 1 (continued)  
Paper type  
Weight  
Capacity1  
Paper orientation  
Other:  
Up to 50 sheets, or 10  
envelopes  
Side to be printed on face-up,  
with the top edge toward the  
product  
Color laser transparency4  
Labels4  
Letterhead  
Envelope4  
Preprinted  
Prepunched  
Colored  
Rough  
Tough4  
1
Capacity can vary depending on paper weight and thickness, and environmental conditions.  
The product supports up to 220 g/m2 (59 lb) for glossy, glossy photo paper, and postcards.  
The product supports 60-160 g/m2 (16-42 lb) paper weight for automatic duplex printing.  
This paper type is not supported for automatic duplex printing.  
2
3
4
Table 6-4 Tray 2 and Tray 3  
Media type  
Weight  
Capacity1  
Paper orientation  
60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb)  
Every day:  
Up to 250 sheets  
Side to be printed on face-up,  
with the top edge at the back of  
the tray  
Plain  
Light  
Bond  
Recycled  
Up to 163 g/m2 (43 lb)2  
Presentation:  
Up to 12.5 mm (0.5 in) stack  
height  
Side to be printed on face-up,  
with the top edge at the back of  
the tray  
Matte paper, mid-weight to  
heavy  
Glossy paper, mid-weight  
to heavy  
Up to 163 g/m2 (43 lb)2  
Brochure:  
Up to 12.5 mm (0.5 in) stack  
height  
Side to be printed on face-up,  
with the top edge at the back of  
the tray  
Matte paper, mid-weight to  
heavy  
Glossy paper, mid-weight  
to heavy  
78  
Chapter 6 Paper and print media  
ENWW  
       
Table 6-4 Tray 2 and Tray 3 (continued)  
Media type  
Weight  
Capacity1  
Paper orientation  
Up to 163 g/m2 (43 lb)2  
Postcard: Up to 176 g/m2 (47 lb)  
Photo/cover  
Up to 12.5 mm (0.5 in) stack  
height  
Side to be printed on face-up,  
with the top edge at the back of  
the tray  
Matte cover paper  
Glossy cover paper  
Matte photo paper  
Glossy photo paper  
Postcard  
Cardstock  
Other:  
Up to 50 sheets, or 10  
envelopes  
Side to be printed on face-up,  
with the top edge at the back of  
the tray or the stamp-end at the  
back of the tray  
Color laser transparency3  
Labels3  
Letterhead  
Envelope3  
Preprinted  
Prepunched  
Colored  
Rough  
Tough3  
1
Capacity can vary depending on paper weight and thickness, and environmental conditions.  
The product supports 60-160 g/m2 (16-42 lb) paper weight for automatic duplex printing.  
This paper type is not supported for automatic duplex printing.  
2
3
Supported paper types and tray capacity  
ENWW  
79  
   
Load paper trays  
Load Tray 1  
1. Open Tray 1.  
2. Pull out the extension tray.  
80  
Chapter 6 Paper and print media  
ENWW  
     
3. If you are loading long sheets of paper, flip  
out the extension.  
4. Extend the paper guides fully (callout 1) and  
then load the paper stack into Tray 1 (callout  
2). Adjust the paper guides to the size of the  
paper.  
NOTE: Place the paper into Tray 1 with the  
side to be printed on face-up and the top  
toward the product.  
Load Tray 2 or optional Tray 3  
1. Pull the tray out of the product.  
Load paper trays  
ENWW  
81  
 
2. Slide open the paper length and width guides.  
3. To load Legal-size paper, extend the tray by  
pressing and holding the extension tab while  
pulling the front of the tray toward you.  
NOTE: When it is loaded with Legal-size  
paper, the tray extends from the front of the  
product approximately 64 mm (2.5 inches).  
4. Place the paper in the tray and make sure  
that it is flat at all four corners. Slide the side  
paper width guides so that they align with the  
paper-size marking in the bottom of the tray.  
Slide the front paper length guide so that it  
pushes the stack of paper against the back of  
the tray.  
82  
Chapter 6 Paper and print media  
ENWW  
5. Push down on the paper to make sure that  
the paper stack is below the paper limit tabs  
on the side of the tray.  
6. Slide the tray into the product.  
Load the document feeder  
The document feeder holds up to 50 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb bond) paper.  
CAUTION: To prevent damage to the product, do not load an original document that contains  
correction tape, correction fluid, paper clips, or staples. Also, do not load photographs, small originals,  
or fragile originals into the document feeder.  
Load paper trays  
ENWW  
83  
   
1. Insert the originals into the document feeder  
face-up.  
2. Adjust the guides until they are snug against  
the paper.  
84  
Chapter 6 Paper and print media  
ENWW  
Configure trays  
By default, the product pulls paper from Tray 1. If Tray 1 is empty, the product pulls paper from Tray  
2, or Tray 3 if it installed. Configuring the tray on this product changes the heat and speed settings to  
obtain the best print quality for the type of paper that you are using. If you are using special paper for  
all or most print jobs on the product, change this default setting on the product.  
The following table lists possible ways you can use the tray settings to meet your printing needs.  
Paper use  
Configure the product  
Print  
Load Tray 1 and one other tray with the Load paper in Tray 1. No configuration  
From the software program, print the  
same paper, and have the product pick is needed, if the default settings for type job.  
paper from one tray if the other one is  
empty.  
and size have not been changed.  
Occasionally use special paper, such  
as heavy paper or letterhead, from a  
tray that usually contains plain paper.  
Load special paper in Tray 1.  
From the software program print dialog,  
chose the paper type that matches the  
special paper loaded in the tray before  
sending the print job.  
Frequently use special paper, such as  
heavy paper or letterhead, from one  
tray.  
Load special paper in Tray 1, and  
configure the tray for the paper type.  
From the software program print dialog,  
chose the paper type that matches the  
special paper loaded in the tray before  
sending the print job.  
Configure trays  
1. Make sure the product is turned on.  
2. Perform one of the following tasks:  
Control panel: Open the System Setup menu, and open the Paper Setup menu. Select the  
tray that you want to configure.  
Embedded Web server: Click the Settings tab, and then click Paper Handling in the left  
panel.  
3. Change the desired tray setting, and then press OK or click Apply.  
Configure trays  
ENWW  
85  
   
86  
Chapter 6 Paper and print media  
ENWW  
7 Print cartridges  
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. For the latest User Guide  
Print cartridge information  
Color  
Cartridge number  
Part number  
Standard-capacity replacement black  
print cartridge  
305A  
305X  
CE410A  
High-capacity replacement black print  
cartridge  
CE410X  
Replacement cyan print cartridge  
Replacement yellow print cartridge  
Replacement magenta print cartridge  
305A  
305A  
305A  
CE411A  
CE412A  
CE413A  
Accessibility: The print cartridge can be installed and removed by using one hand.  
Environmental features: Recycle print cartridges by using the HP Planet Partners return and  
recycling program.  
For more information about supplies, go to www.hp.com/go/learnaboutsupplies.  
Print cartridge information  
ENWW  
87  
     
Supplies views  
Print cartridge views  
1
2
3
Cartridge memory chip  
Plastic shield  
Imaging Drum. Do not touch the imaging drum on the bottom of the print cartridge. Fingerprints on the imaging drum  
can cause print-quality problems.  
88  
Chapter 7 Print cartridges  
ENWW  
   
Manage print cartridges  
Correctly using, storing, and monitoring the print cartridge can help ensure high-quality print output.  
Change settings for print cartridges  
Print when a print cartridge is at estimated end of life  
Supply-related notifications are communicated on the product control panel.  
A <Supply> Low message—where <Supply> is the color cartridge—appears when a print  
cartridge is nearing the estimated end of its useful life.  
A <Supply> Very Low message appears when the print cartridge is at its estimated end of  
useful life. To ensure optimal print quality, HP recommends replacing a print cartridge when the  
<Supply> Very Low message appears.  
Print-quality problems can occur when using a cartridge that is at its estimated end of life. The supply  
does not need to be replaced at this point in time unless the print quality is no longer acceptable.  
NOTE: Using the Continue setting allows printing beyond Very Low without customer interaction  
and can result in unsatisfactory print quality.  
When a color print cartridge becomes very low, the product prints in black only to prevent fax  
interruptions. To configure the product to print in color and use the remaining toner in the print  
cartridge past very low, follow these steps:  
1.  
2. Open the following menus:  
From the Home screen on the control panel, touch the Setup  
button.  
System Setup  
Supply Settings  
Color Cartridges  
Very Low Setting  
Continue  
When you choose to replace the very low print cartridge, color printing resumes automatically.  
Manage print cartridges  
ENWW  
89  
   
Enable or disable the At Very Low settings from the control panel  
You can enable or disable the default settings at any time, and you do not have to re-enable them  
when you install a new print cartridge.  
1.  
2. Open the following menus:  
From the Home screen on the control panel, touch the Setup  
button.  
System Setup  
Supply Settings  
Black Cartridge or Color Cartridges  
Very Low Setting  
3. Select one of the following options:  
Select the Continue option to set the product to alert you that the print cartridge is very low,  
but to continue printing.  
Select the Stop option to set the product to stop printing (including printing faxes) until you  
replace the print cartridge.  
Select the Prompt option to set the product to stop printing (including printing faxes) and  
prompt you to replace the print cartridge. You can acknowledge the prompt and continue  
printing. A customer configurable option on this product is "Prompt to Remind Me in 100  
pages, 200 pages, 300 pages, or never." This option is provided as a customer  
convenience and is not an indication these pages will have acceptable print quality.  
On the Color Cartridges menu only, select Print Black (the default option) to alert you when  
the print cartridge is very low, but to continue printing in black only.  
When the product is set to the Stop option, there is some risk that faxes will not print after the new  
cartridge is installed if your product has received more faxes than the memory can hold while  
stopped.  
When the product is set to the Prompt option, there is some risk that faxes will not print after the new  
cartridge is installed if your product has received more faxes than the memory can hold while the  
product is waiting for the prompt to be acknowledged.  
Once an HP supply has reached very low, HP’s premium Protection Warranty on that supply has  
ended. All print defects or cartridge failures incurred when an HP supply is used in Continue at very  
low mode will not be considered to be defects in materials or workmanship in the supply under the  
HP Print Cartridge Warranty Statement.  
Print with EconoMode  
EconoMode uses less toner, which might extend the life of the print cartridge.  
90  
Chapter 7 Print cartridges  
ENWW  
 
HP does not recommend the full-time use of EconoMode. If EconoMode is used full-time, the toner  
supply might outlast the mechanical parts in the print cartridge. If print quality begins to degrade and  
is no longer acceptable, consider replacing the print cartridge.  
1. On the File menu in the software program, click Print.  
2. Select the product, and then click the Properties or Preferences button.  
3. Click the Paper/Quality tab.  
4. Click the EconoMode check box.  
Store and recycle supplies  
Recycle supplies  
To recycle a genuine HP print cartridge, place the used cartridge in the box in which the new  
cartridge arrived. Use the enclosed return label to send the used supply to HP for recycling. For  
complete information, see the recycling guide that is included with each new HP supply item.  
Print-cartridge storage  
Do not remove the print cartridge from its package until you are ready to use it.  
CAUTION: To prevent damage to the print cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few  
minutes.  
HP policy on non-HP print cartridges  
Hewlett-Packard Company cannot recommend the use of non-HP print cartridges, either new or  
remanufactured.  
NOTE: Any damage caused by a non-HP print cartridge is not covered under the HP warranty and  
service agreements.  
HP anticounterfeit Web site  
Go to www.hp.com/go/anticounterfeit when you install an HP print cartridge and the control-panel  
message says the cartridge is non-HP. HP will help determine if the cartridge is genuine and take  
steps to resolve the problem.  
Your print cartridge might not be a genuine HP print cartridge if you notice the following:  
The supplies status page indicates that a non-HP supply is installed.  
You are experiencing a high number of problems with the print cartridge.  
The cartridge does not look like it usually does (for example, the packaging differs from  
HP packaging).  
Manage print cartridges  
ENWW  
91  
           
Replacement instructions  
Replace the print cartridges  
The product uses four colors and has a different print cartridge for each color: black (K), magenta (M),  
cyan (C), and yellow (Y).  
CAUTION: If toner gets on any clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash the clothing in cold  
water. Hot water sets toner into the fabric.  
1. Open the front door.  
2. Pull out the print-cartridge drawer.  
92  
Chapter 7 Print cartridges  
ENWW  
     
3. Grasp the handle on the old print cartridge  
and then pull the cartridge straight up to  
remove it.  
4. Remove the new print cartridge from the  
packaging.  
5. Gently rock the print cartridge from front to  
back to distribute the toner evenly inside the  
cartridge.  
Replacement instructions  
ENWW  
93  
6. Remove the orange, plastic shield from the  
bottom of the new print cartridge.  
7. Do not touch the imaging drum on the bottom  
of the print cartridge. Fingerprints on the  
imaging drum can cause print-quality  
problems.  
8. Insert the new print cartridge into the product.  
94  
Chapter 7 Print cartridges  
ENWW  
9. Pull the tab on the left side of the print  
cartridge straight up to completely remove the  
sealing tape. Recycle the sealing tape.  
10. Close the print-cartridge drawer.  
11. Close the front door.  
12. Place the old print cartridge, the sealing tape,  
and the orange plastic shield in the box for  
the new print cartridge. Follow the recycling  
instructions that are included in the box.  
Replacement instructions  
ENWW  
95  
Solve problems with supplies  
Check the print cartridges  
Check each print cartridge, and replace it if necessary, if you are having any of the following  
problems:  
The printing is too light or seems faded in areas.  
Printed pages have small unprinted areas.  
Printed pages have streaks or bands.  
NOTE: If you are using a draft print setting, the printing might appear light.  
If you determine that you need to replace a print cartridge, print the Supplies Status Page to find the  
part number for the correct genuine HP print cartridge.  
Type of print cartridge  
Steps to resolve the problem  
Refilled or remanufactured print  
cartridge  
Hewlett Packard Company cannot recommend the use of non-HP supplies, either  
new or remanufactured. Because they are not HP products, HP cannot influence  
their design or control their quality. If you are using a refilled or remanufactured  
print cartridge and are not satisfied with the print quality, replace the cartridge with  
a genuine HP cartridge.  
Genuine HP print cartridge  
1. The product control panel or the Supplies Status page indicates Very Low  
status when the cartridge has reached the end of its estimated life. Replace  
the print cartridge if print quality is no longer acceptable.  
2. Print a Print Quality Page from the Reports menu. If streaks or marks are in  
one color on the page, you might have a defect in that color cartridge. See  
the instructions in this document for interpreting the page. Replace the print  
cartridge if necessary.  
3. Visually inspect the print cartridge for damage. See the instructions that  
follow. Replace the print cartridge if necessary.  
4. If printed pages have marks that repeat several times at the same distance  
apart, print a cleaning page. If this does not solve the problem, use the  
repetitive defects ruler in this document to identify the cause of the problem.  
96  
Chapter 7 Print cartridges  
ENWW  
   
Print the Supplies Status page  
The Supplies Status page indicates the estimated life remaining in print cartridges. It also lists the  
part number for the correct genuine HP print cartridge for your product so you can order a  
replacement print cartridge, as well as other useful information.  
1. At the control panel, press the OK button to open the menus.  
2. Open the following menus:  
Reports  
Supplies Status  
Solve problems with supplies  
ENWW  
97  
 
Interpret the Print Quality Page  
1. On the product control panel, open the Reports menu.  
2. Select the Print Quality Page item to print it.  
This page contains five bands of color, which are divided into four groups as indicated in the following  
illustration. By examining each group, you can isolate the problem to a particular print cartridge.  
Section  
Print-cartridge  
Yellow  
1
2
3
4
Cyan  
Black  
Magenta  
If dots or streaks appear in only one of the groups, replace the print cartridge that correlates with  
that group.  
If dots appear in more than one group, print a cleaning page. If this does not solve the problem,  
determine if the dots are always the same color; for example, if magenta dots appear in all five  
color bands. If the dots are all the same color, replace that print cartridge.  
If streaks appear in multiple color bands, contact HP. A component other than the print cartridge  
is probably causing the problem.  
Inspect the print cartridge for damage  
1. Remove the print cartridge from the product, and verify that the sealing tape has been removed.  
2. Check the memory chip for damage.  
98  
Chapter 7 Print cartridges  
ENWW  
   
3. Examine the surface of the green imaging drum on the bottom of the print cartridge.  
CAUTION: Do not touch the green roller (imaging drum) on the bottom of the cartridge.  
Fingerprints on the imaging drum can cause print-quality problems.  
4. If you see any scratches, fingerprints, or other damage on the imaging drum, replace the print  
cartridge.  
5. If the imaging drum does not appear to be damaged, rock the print cartridge gently several times  
and reinstall it. Print a few pages to see if the problem has resolved.  
Repeating defects  
If defects repeat at any of the following intervals on the page, a print cartridge might be damaged.  
22 mm  
27 mm  
28 mm  
75 mm  
Solve problems with supplies  
ENWW  
99  
   
Interpret control panel messages for supplies  
10.100X Supply Memory Error  
Description  
A specific print cartridge has a faulty or missing memory chip.  
"X" indicates the cartridge: 0=black, 1=cyan, 2=magenta, 3=yellow.  
Recommended action  
Check the memory chip. If it is broken or damaged, replace the cartridge.  
Verify that the cartridge is installed in the correct location.  
Reinstall the print cartridge.  
Turn off and then turn on the product.  
If the error is with a color cartridge, try swapping it with a different color cartridge in the tray. If the  
same message appears, then there is an engine problem. If a different 10.100X message appears,  
replace the cartridge.  
If the problem is not solved, replace the cartridge.  
Black Cartridge Low  
Description  
The print cartridge is nearing the end of its useful life.  
Recommended action  
Printing can continue, but consider having a replacement supply on hand.  
Black in wrong position  
Description  
The print cartridge is installed in the incorrect slot.  
Recommended action  
Make sure that each print cartridge is installed in the correct slot. From front to back, the print  
cartridges are installed in this order: black, cyan, magenta, and yellow.  
Black Very Low  
Description  
The print cartridge is at the end of its useful life. The product continues printing to prevent fax  
interruptions.  
100  
Chapter 7 Print cartridges  
ENWW  
 
Recommended action  
To ensure optimal print quality, HP recommends replacing the print cartridge at this point. You can  
continue printing until you notice a decrease in print quality. Actual cartridge life may vary.  
Once an HP supply has reached very low, HP's premium Protection Warranty on that supply has  
ended. All print defects or cartridge failures incurred when an HP supply is used in continue at very  
low mode will not be considered to be defects in materials or workmanship in the supply under the HP  
Print Cartridge Warranty Statement.  
Cyan Cartridge Low  
Description  
The print cartridge is nearing the end of its useful life.  
Recommended action  
Printing can continue, but consider having a replacement supply on hand.  
Cyan in wrong position  
Description  
The print cartridge is installed in the incorrect slot.  
Recommended action  
Make sure that each print cartridge is installed in the correct slot. From front to back, the print  
cartridges are installed in this order: black, cyan, magenta, and yellow.  
Cyan Very Low  
Description  
The print cartridge is at the end of its useful life. When a color print cartridge becomes very low, the  
product prints in black only to prevent fax interruptions. When you choose to replace the very low  
print cartridge, color printing resumes automatically.  
Recommended action  
To ensure optimal print quality, HP recommends replacing the print cartridge at this point. You can  
continue printing until you notice a decrease in print quality. Actual cartridge life may vary.  
Once an HP supply has reached very low, HP's premium Protection Warranty on that supply has  
ended. All print defects or cartridge failures incurred when an HP supply is used in continue at very  
low mode will not be considered to be defects in materials or workmanship in the supply under the HP  
Print Cartridge Warranty Statement.  
Genuine HP supply installed  
Description  
A genuine HP supply was installed.  
Solve problems with supplies  
ENWW  
101  
Recommended action  
No action necessary.  
Incompatible <color>  
Description  
You have installed a print cartridge that is intended for use in a different HP product model. The  
product might not function correctly with this print cartridge installed.  
Recommended action  
Install the correct print cartridge for this product.  
Install [color] cartridge  
Description  
One of the color cartridges is not installed with the door closed.  
Recommended action  
Install the indicated color cartridge.  
Magenta Cartridge Low  
Description  
The print cartridge is nearing the end of its useful life.  
Recommended action  
Printing can continue, but consider having a replacement supply on hand.  
Magenta in wrong position  
Description  
The print cartridge is installed in the incorrect slot.  
Recommended action  
Make sure that each print cartridge is installed in the correct slot. From front to back, the print  
cartridges are installed in this order: black, cyan, magenta, and yellow.  
Magenta Very Low  
Description  
The print cartridge is at the end of its useful life. When a color print cartridge becomes very low, the  
product prints in black only to prevent fax interruptions. When you choose to replace the very low  
print cartridge, color printing resumes automatically.  
102  
Chapter 7 Print cartridges  
ENWW  
Recommended action  
To ensure optimal print quality, HP recommends replacing the print cartridge at this point. You can  
continue printing until you notice a decrease in print quality. Actual cartridge life may vary.  
Once an HP supply has reached very low, HP's premium Protection Warranty on that supply has  
ended. All print defects or cartridge failures incurred when an HP supply is used in continue at very  
low mode will not be considered to be defects in materials or workmanship in the supply under the HP  
Print Cartridge Warranty Statement.  
Remove shipping lock from <color> cartridge  
Description  
A print cartridge shipping lock is installed.  
Recommended action  
Pull the orange tab to remove the shipping lock from the cartridge.  
Remove shipping locks from cartridges  
Description  
A print cartridge shipping lock is installed on one or more print cartridges.  
Recommended action  
Pull the orange tab to remove the shipping lock from the cartridge.  
Replace [color]  
Description  
The print cartridge is at the end of its useful life, and the product is customer-configured to stop  
printing when it reaches the very low state.  
Recommended action  
To ensure optimal print quality, HP recommends replacing the print cartridge at this point. You can  
continue printing until you notice a decrease in print quality. Actual cartridge life may vary.  
Once an HP supply has reached very low, HP's premium Protection Warranty on that supply has  
ended. All print defects or cartridge failures incurred when an HP supply is used in continue at very  
low mode will not be considered to be defects in materials or workmanship in the supply under the HP  
Print Cartridge Warranty Statement.  
Unsupported <color> Press [OK] to continue  
Description  
The product has detected a print cartridge that was not made by HP.  
Solve problems with supplies  
ENWW  
103  
Recommended action  
Press the OK button to continue printing.  
If you believe you purchased an HP supply, go to www.hp.com/go/anticounterfeit. Service or repairs  
that are required as a result of using unsupported supplies is not covered under HP warranty.  
Used <color> in use  
Description  
You are using a print cartridge that reached the default low threshold while it was installed in a  
product.  
Recommended action  
Printing can continue, but consider having a replacement supply on hand.  
Used [color] installed, to accept press OK  
Description  
A used color print cartridge has been installed or moved.  
Recommended action  
Touch the OK button to return to the Ready state.  
Used supplies in use  
Description  
You are using more than one print cartridge that reached the default low threshold while it was  
installed in a product.  
Recommended action  
Printing can continue, but consider having replacement supplies on hand.  
Yellow Cartridge Low  
Description  
The print cartridge is nearing the end of its useful life.  
Recommended action  
Printing can continue, but consider having a replacement supply on hand.  
Yellow in wrong position  
Description  
The print cartridge is installed in the incorrect slot.  
104  
Chapter 7 Print cartridges  
ENWW  
Recommended action  
Make sure that each print cartridge is installed in the correct slot. From front to back, the print  
cartridges are installed in this order: black, cyan, magenta, and yellow.  
Yellow Very Low  
Description  
The print cartridge is at the end of its useful life. When a color print cartridge becomes very low, the  
product prints in black only to prevent fax interruptions. When you choose to replace the very low  
print cartridge, color printing resumes automatically.  
Recommended action  
To ensure optimal print quality, HP recommends replacing the print cartridge at this point. You can  
continue printing until you notice a decrease in print quality. Actual cartridge life may vary.  
Once an HP supply has reached very low, HP's premium Protection Warranty on that supply has  
ended. All print defects or cartridge failures incurred when an HP supply is used in continue at very  
low mode will not be considered to be defects in materials or workmanship in the supply under the HP  
Print Cartridge Warranty Statement.  
Solve problems with supplies  
ENWW  
105  
106  
Chapter 7 Print cartridges  
ENWW  
Cancel a print job  
1. If the print job is currently printing, cancel it by pressing the Cancel  
button on the product  
control panel.  
NOTE: Pressing the Cancel  
button clears the job that the product is currently processing. If  
more than one process is running, pressing the Cancel  
currently appears on the product control panel.  
button clears the process that  
2. You can also cancel a print job from a software program or a print queue.  
Software program: Typically, a dialog box appears briefly on the computer screen,  
allowing you to cancel the print job.  
Windows print queue: If a print job is waiting in a print queue (computer memory) or print  
spooler, delete the job there.  
Windows XP, Server 2003, or Server 2008: Click Start, click Settings, and then click  
Printers and Faxes. Double-click the product icon to open the window, right-click the  
print job that you want to cancel, and then click Cancel.  
Windows Vista: Click Start, click Control Panel, and then, under Hardware and  
Sound, click Printer. Double-click the product icon to open the window, right-click the  
print job that you want to cancel, and then click Cancel.  
Windows 7: Click Start, and then click Devices and Printers. Double-click the  
product icon to open the window, right-click the print job that you want to cancel, and  
then click Cancel.  
108  
Chapter 8 Print tasks  
ENWW  
   
Basic print tasks with Windows  
The methods to open the print dialog from software programs can vary. The procedures that follow  
include a typical method. Some software programs do not have a File menu. See the documentation  
for your software program to learn how to open the print dialog.  
Open the printer driver with Windows  
1. On the File menu in the software program,  
click Print.  
2. Select the product, and then click the  
Properties or Preferences button.  
Basic print tasks with Windows  
ENWW  
109  
     
Get help for any printing option with Windows  
1. Click the Help button to open the online Help.  
110  
Chapter 8 Print tasks  
ENWW  
   
Change the number of print copies with Windows  
1. On the File menu in the software program, click Print.  
2. Select the product, and then select the number of copies.  
Save custom print settings for reuse with Windows  
Use a printing shortcut with Windows  
1. On the File menu in the software program,  
click Print.  
2. Select the product, and then click the  
Properties or Preferences button.  
Basic print tasks with Windows  
ENWW  
111  
         
3. Click the Printing Shortcuts tab.  
4. Select one of the shortcuts, and then click the  
OK button.  
NOTE: When you select a shortcut, the  
corresponding settings change on the other  
tabs in the printer driver.  
Create printing shortcuts  
1. On the File menu in the software program,  
click Print.  
112  
Chapter 8 Print tasks  
ENWW  
 
2. Select the product, and then click the  
Properties or Preferences button.  
3. Click the Printing Shortcuts tab.  
4. Select an existing shortcut as a base.  
NOTE: Always select a shortcut before  
adjusting any of the settings on the right side  
of the screen. If you adjust the settings and  
then select a shortcut, all your adjustments  
are lost.  
Basic print tasks with Windows  
ENWW  
113  
5. Select the print options for the new shortcut.  
6. Click the Save As button.  
7. Type a name for the shortcut, and click the  
OK button.  
Improve print quality with Windows  
Select the page size with Windows  
1. On the File menu in the software program, click Print.  
2. Select the product, and then click the Properties or Preferences button.  
114  
Chapter 8 Print tasks  
ENWW  
     
3. Click the Paper/Quality tab.  
4. Select a size from the Paper size drop-down list.  
Select a custom page size with Windows  
1. On the File menu in the software program, click Print.  
2. Select the product, and then click the Properties or Preferences button.  
3. Click the Paper/Quality tab.  
4. Click the Custom button.  
5. Type a name for the custom size and specify the dimensions.  
The width is the short edge of the paper.  
The length is the long edge of the paper.  
NOTE: Always load paper into the trays short edge first.  
6. Click the OK button, and then click the OK button on the Paper/Quality tab. The custom page  
size will appear in the list of paper sizes the next time you open the printer driver.  
Select the paper type with Windows  
1. On the File menu in the software program, click Print.  
2. Select the product, and then click the Properties or Preferences button.  
3. Click the Paper/Quality tab.  
4. From the Paper type drop-down list, click the More... option.  
5. Expand the list of Type is: options.  
6. Expand the category of paper types that best describes your paper, and then click the paper  
type that you are using.  
Select the paper tray with Windows  
1. On the File menu in the software program, click Print.  
2. Select the product, and then click the Properties or Preferences button.  
3. Click the Paper/Quality tab.  
4. Select a tray from the Paper source drop-down list.  
Basic print tasks with Windows  
ENWW  
115  
     
Print on both sides (duplex) with Windows  
Print on both sides manually with Windows  
1. On the File menu in the software program,  
click Print.  
2. Select the product, and then click the  
Properties or Preferences button.  
3. Click the Finishing tab.  
116  
Chapter 8 Print tasks  
ENWW  
   
4. Select the Print on both sides (manually)  
check box. Click the OK button to print the  
first side of the job.  
5. Retrieve the printed stack from the output bin,  
and maintaining the same orientation, place it  
with the printed side facing down in Tray 1.  
6. On the control panel, press the OK button to  
print the second side of the job.  
Automatically print on both sides with Windows  
1. On the File menu in the software program,  
click Print.  
Basic print tasks with Windows  
ENWW  
117  
2. Select the product, and then click the  
Properties or Preferences button.  
3. Click the Finishing tab.  
4. Select the Print on both sides check box.  
Click the OK button to print the job.  
118  
Chapter 8 Print tasks  
ENWW  
Print multiple pages per sheet with Windows  
1. On the File menu in the software program,  
click Print.  
2. Select the product, and then click the  
Properties or Preferences button.  
3. Click the Finishing tab.  
Basic print tasks with Windows  
ENWW  
119  
   
4. Select the number of pages per sheet from  
the Pages per sheet drop-down list.  
5. Select the correct Print page borders, Page  
order, and Orientation options.  
Select page orientation with Windows  
1. On the File menu in the software program,  
click Print.  
120  
Chapter 8 Print tasks  
ENWW  
   
2. Select the product, and then click the  
Properties or Preferences button.  
3. Click the Finishing tab.  
4. In the Orientation area, select the Portrait or  
Landscape option.  
To print the page image upside down, select  
the Rotate by 180 degrees option.  
Basic print tasks with Windows  
ENWW  
121  
Set color options with Windows  
1. On the File menu in the software program, click Print.  
2. Select the product, and then click the Properties or Preferences button.  
3. Click the Color tab.  
4. Click the HP EasyColor check box to clear it.  
5. In the Color Options area, click the Manual option, and then click the Settings button.  
6. Adjust the general settings for Edge Control, and settings for text, graphics, and photographs.  
122  
Chapter 8 Print tasks  
ENWW  
   
Use HP ePrint  
Use HP ePrint to print documents by sending them as an e-mail attachment to the product's e-mail  
address from any e-mail enabled device.  
NOTE: The product must be connected to a wired or wireless network and have Internet access to  
use HP ePrint.  
1. To use HP ePrint, you must first enable HP Web Services.  
a. From the Home screen on the product control panel, touch the Web Services button.  
b. Touch the Enable Web Services button.  
2. From the HP Web Services menu, touch the Display E-Mail Address button to display the  
product's e-mail address on the control panel.  
3. Use the HP ePrintCenter Web site to define security settings and to configure default print  
settings for all HP ePrint jobs sent to this product.  
b. Click Sign In, and enter your HP ePrintCenter credentials or sign up for a new account.  
c. Select your product from the list, or click + Add printer to add it. To add the product, you  
need the printer code, which is the segment of the product e-mail address that is before the  
@ symbol.  
NOTE: This code is valid for only 24 hours from the time you enable HP Web Services. If  
it expires, follow the instructions to enable HP Web Services again, and obtain a new code.  
d. To prevent your product from printing unexpected documents, click ePrint Settings, and  
then click the Allowed Senders tab. Click Allowed Senders Only, and add the e-mail  
addresses from which you want to allow ePrint jobs.  
e. To set up default settings for all ePrint jobs sent to this product, click ePrint Settings, click  
Print Options, and select the settings that you want to use.  
4. To print a document, attach it to an e-mail message sent to the product's e-mail address.  
Use HP ePrint  
ENWW  
123  
   
Additional print tasks with Windows  
Print colored text as black (grayscale) with Windows  
1. On the File menu in the software program, click Print.  
2. Select the product, and then click the Properties or Preferences button.  
3. Click the Advanced tab.  
4. Expand the Document Options section.  
5. Expand the Printer Features section.  
6. In the Print All Text as Black drop-down list, select the Enabled option.  
Print on preprinted letterhead or forms with Windows  
1. On the File menu in the software program,  
click Print.  
2. Select the product, and then click the  
Properties or Preferences button.  
124  
Chapter 8 Print tasks  
ENWW  
         
3. Click the Paper/Quality tab.  
4. From the Paper type drop-down list, click the  
More... option.  
5. Expand the list of Type is: options.  
Additional print tasks with Windows  
ENWW  
125  
6. Expand the list of Other options.  
7. Select the option for the type of paper you are  
using, and click the OK button.  
Print on special paper, labels, or transparencies with Windows  
1. On the File menu in the software program,  
click Print.  
126  
Chapter 8 Print tasks  
ENWW  
   
2. Select the product, and then click the  
Properties or Preferences button.  
3. Click the Paper/Quality tab.  
4. From the Paper type drop-down list, click the  
More... option.  
Additional print tasks with Windows  
ENWW  
127  
5. Expand the list of Type is: options.  
6. Expand the category of paper types that best  
describes your paper.  
NOTE: Labels and transparencies are in the  
list of Other options.  
7. Select the option for the type of paper you are  
using, and click the OK button.  
128  
Chapter 8 Print tasks  
ENWW  
Print the first or last page on different paper with Windows  
1. On the File menu in the software program,  
click Print.  
2. Select the product, and then click the  
Properties or Preferences button.  
3. Click the Paper/Quality tab.  
Additional print tasks with Windows  
ENWW  
129  
   
4. In the Special pages area, click the Print  
pages on different paper option, and then  
click the Settings button.  
5. In the Pages in document area, select either  
the First or Last option.  
6. Select the correct options from the Paper  
source and Paper type drop-down lists. Click  
the Add button.  
130  
Chapter 8 Print tasks  
ENWW  
7. If you are printing both the first and last pages  
on different paper, repeat steps 5 and 6,  
selecting the options for the other page.  
8. Click the OK button.  
Scale a document to fit page size with Windows  
1. On the File menu in the software program,  
click Print.  
Additional print tasks with Windows  
ENWW  
131  
   
2. Select the product, and then click the  
Properties or Preferences button.  
3. Click the Effects tab.  
4. Select the Print document on option, and  
then select a size from the drop-down list.  
132  
Chapter 8 Print tasks  
ENWW  
Add a watermark to a document with Windows  
1. On the File menu in the software program, click Print.  
2. Select the product, and then click the Properties or Preferences button.  
3. Click the Effects tab.  
4. Select a watermark from the Watermarks drop-down list.  
Or, to add a new watermark to the list, click the Edit button. Specify the settings for the  
watermark, and then click the OK button.  
5. To print the watermark on the first page only, select the First page only check box. Otherwise,  
the watermark is printed on each page.  
Create a booklet with Windows  
1. On the File menu in the software program,  
click Print.  
2. Select the product, and then click the  
Properties or Preferences button.  
Additional print tasks with Windows  
ENWW  
133  
       
3. Click the Finishing tab.  
4. Select the Print on both sides check box.  
5. In the Booklet layout drop-down list, click the  
Left binding or Right binding option. The  
Pages per sheet option automatically  
changes to 2 pages per sheet.  
134  
Chapter 8 Print tasks  
ENWW  
6. Retrieve the printed stack from the output bin,  
and maintaining the same orientation, place it  
with the printed-side facing down in Tray 1.  
7. On the control panel, touch the OK button to  
print the second side of the job.  
Additional print tasks with Windows  
ENWW  
135  
Walk-up USB printing  
This product features printing from a USB flash drive, so you can quickly print files without sending  
them from a computer. The product accepts standard USB storage accessories in the USB port on  
the front of the product. You can print the following types of files:  
.PDF  
.JPEG  
1. Insert the USB drive into the USB port on the  
front of the product.  
2. The USB Flash Drive menu opens. Touch  
one of the following options.  
Print Documents  
View and Print Photos  
Scan to USB Drive  
3. To print a document, touch the Print  
Documents item, and then touch the name of  
the folder on the USB drive where the  
document is stored. When the summary  
screen opens, you can touch it to adjust the  
settings. Touch the Print button to print the  
document.  
136  
Chapter 8 Print tasks  
ENWW  
   
4. To print photos, touch the View and Print  
Photos item, and then touch the preview  
image for each photo that you want to print.  
Touch the Done button. When the summary  
screen opens, you can touch it to adjust the  
settings. Touch the Print button to print the  
photos.  
5. To scan a document and save it as a .JPEG  
or .PDF file onto the USB drive, load the  
document onto the scanner glass or into the  
document feeder. Touch the Scan to USB  
Drive item. Touch the Settings... button to  
adjust the scan settings.  
Walk-up USB printing  
ENWW  
137  
138  
Chapter 8 Print tasks  
ENWW  
Adjust color  
Manage color by changing the settings on the Color tab in the printer driver.  
Change the color theme for a print job  
1. On the File menu in the software program, click Print.  
2. Click Properties or Preferences.  
3. Click the Color tab.  
4. Select a color theme from the Color Themes drop-down list.  
Default (sRGB): This theme sets the product to print RGB data in raw device mode. When  
using this theme, manage color in the software program or in the operating system for  
correct rendering.  
Vivid: The product increases the color saturation in the midtones. Use this theme when  
printing business graphics.  
Photo: The product interprets RGB color as if it were printed as a photograph using a  
digital mini lab. The product renders deeper, more saturated colors differently than with the  
Default (sRBG) theme. Use this theme when printing photos.  
Photo (Adobe RGB 1998): Use this theme with printing digital photos that use the  
AdobeRGB color space rather than sRGB. Turn off color management in the software  
program when using this theme.  
None: No color theme is used.  
140  
Chapter 9 Color  
ENWW  
     
Change the color options  
Change the color options settings for the current print job from the color tab of the printer driver.  
1. On the File menu in the software program, click the Print item.  
2. Click Properties or Preferences.  
3. Click the Color tab.  
4. Clear the HP EasyColor check box.  
5. Click the Automatic or Manual setting.  
Automatic setting: Select this setting for most color print jobs  
Manual setting: Select this setting to adjust the color settings independent from other  
settings.  
NOTE: Changing color settings manually can impact output. HP recommends that only  
color graphics experts change these settings.  
6. Click the Print in Grayscale option to print a color document in black and shades of gray. Use  
this option to print color documents for photocopying or faxing. You can also use this option to  
print draft copies or to save color cartridge life.  
7. Click the OK button.  
Manual color options  
Use manual color options to adjust the Neutral Grays, Halftone, and Edge Control options for text,  
graphics, and photographs.  
Adjust color  
ENWW  
141  
   
Table 9-1 Manual color options  
Setting description  
Setting options  
Edge Control  
Off turns off both trapping and adaptive halftoning.  
The Edge Control setting determines the rendering  
of edges. Edge control has two components:  
adaptive halftoning and trapping. Adaptive  
Light sets trapping at a minimal level. Adaptive halftoning is on.  
Normal sets trapping at a medium level. Adaptive halftoning is  
on.  
halftoning increases edge sharpness. Trapping  
reduces the effect of color-plane misregistration by  
overlapping the edges of adjacent objects slightly.  
Maximum is the most aggressive trapping setting. Adaptive  
halftoning is on.  
Halftone  
Smooth provides better results for large, solid-filled print areas  
and enhances photographs by smoothing color gradations.  
Select this option when uniform and smooth area fills are  
important.  
Halftone options affect color output clarity and  
resolution.  
Detail is useful for text and graphics that require sharp  
distinctions among lines or colors, or images that contain a  
pattern or a high level of detail. Select this option when sharp  
edges and small details are important.  
Neutral Grays  
Black Only generates neutral colors (grays and black) by using  
only black toner. This guarantees neutral colors without a color  
cast. This setting is best for documents and grayscale  
viewgraphs.  
The Neutral Grays setting determines the method  
for creating gray colors used in text, graphics, and  
photographs.  
4-Color generates neutral colors (grays and black) by combining  
all four toner colors. This method produces smoother gradients  
and transitions to other colors, and it produces the darkest black.  
142  
Chapter 9 Color  
ENWW  
     
Use the HP EasyColor option  
If you are using the HP PCL 6 printer driver for Windows, the HP EasyColor technology automatically  
improves mixed-content documents that are printed from Microsoft Office programs. This technology  
scans documents and automatically adjusts photographic images in .JPEG or .PNG format.  
HP EasyColor technology enhances the entire image at one time, rather than dividing it into several  
pieces, which results in improved color consistency, sharper details, and faster printing.  
If you are using the HP Postscript printer driver for Mac, HP EasyColor technology scans all  
documents and automatically adjusts all photographic images with the same improved photographic  
results.  
In the following example, the images on the left were created without using the HP EasyColor option.  
The images on the right show the enhancements that result from using the HP EasyColor option.  
The HP EasyColor option is enabled by default in both the HP PCL 6 printer driver and the HP Mac  
Postscript printer driver, so you do not need to make manual color adjustments. To disable the option  
so you can manually adjust the color settings, open the Color tab in the Windows driver or the Color/  
Quality Options tab in the Mac driver, and then click the HP EasyColor check box to clear it.  
Use the HP EasyColor option  
ENWW  
143  
   
Match colors to your computer screen  
For most users, the best method for matching colors is to print sRGB colors.  
The process of matching printer output color to your computer screen is complex, because printers  
and computer monitors use different methods of producing color. Monitors display colors by using  
light pixels that use an RGB (red, green, blue) color process, but printers print colors by using a  
CMYK (cyan, magenta, yellow, and black) process.  
Several factors can influence your ability to match printed colors to those on your monitor:  
Print media  
Printer colorants (inks or toners, for example)  
Printing process (inkjet, press, or laser technology, for example)  
Overhead lighting  
Personal differences in perception of color  
Software programs  
Printer drivers  
Computer operating systems  
Monitors  
Video cards and drivers  
Operating environment (humidity, for example)  
Keep these factors in mind when colors on your screen do not perfectly match your printed colors.  
144  
Chapter 9 Color  
ENWW  
     
Use copy functions  
Copy  
1. Load the document onto the scanner glass or into the document feeder.  
2. From the Home screen, touch the Copy button.  
3. Touch the Black or Color button to start copying.  
Multiple copies  
1. Load the document onto the scanner glass or into the document feeder.  
2. From the Home screen, touch the Copy button.  
146  
Chapter 10 Copy  
ENWW  
         
3. Touch the arrows to change the number of copies, or touch the existing number and type the  
number of copies.  
4. Touch the Black or Color button to start copying.  
Copy a multiple-page original  
1. Insert the originals into the document feeder face-up.  
2. Adjust the guides until they are snug against the paper.  
3. From the Home screen, touch the Copy button.  
4. Touch the Black or Color button to start copying.  
Use copy functions  
ENWW  
147  
 
Copy identification cards  
Use the ID Copy feature to copy both sides of identification cards, or other small-size documents,  
onto the same side of one sheet of paper. The product prompts you to copy the first side and then to  
place the second side on a different area of the scanner glass and copy again. The product prints  
both images at the same time.  
1. Load the document onto the scanner glass.  
2. From the Home screen, touch the Copy  
button.  
3. Touch the ID Copy button.  
4. Touch the Black or Color button to start  
copying.  
5. The product prompts you to place the next  
page on a different section of the scanner  
glass.  
6. Touch the OK button if you have more pages  
to copy, or touch the Done button if this is the  
last page.  
7. The product copies all pages onto one side of  
a sheet of paper.  
148  
Chapter 10 Copy  
ENWW  
   
Cancel a copy job  
1. Touch the Cancel  
button on the product control panel.  
NOTE: If more than one process is running, touching the Cancel  
button clears the current  
process and all pending processes.  
2. Remove the remaining pages from the document feeder.  
Reduce or enlarge a copy  
1. Load the document onto the scanner glass or  
into the document feeder.  
2. From the Home screen, touch the Copy  
button.  
3. Touch the Settings... button, and then touch  
the Reduce/Enlarge button. Touch the arrow  
buttons to scroll through the options, and then  
touch an option to select it.  
4. Touch the Black or Color button to start  
copying.  
Use copy functions  
ENWW  
149  
       
Collate a copy job  
1. Load the document onto the scanner glass or  
into the document feeder.  
2. From the Home screen, touch the Copy  
button.  
3. Touch the Settings... button, and then scroll to  
and touch the Collation button. Touch the  
arrow buttons to scroll through the options,  
and then touch an option to select it.  
4. Touch the Black or Color button to start  
copying.  
150  
Chapter 10 Copy  
ENWW  
   
Make color or black and white copies  
1. Load the document onto the scanner glass or into the document feeder.  
2. From the Home screen, touch the Copy button.  
3. Touch the Black or Color button to start copying.  
Use copy functions  
ENWW  
151  
 
Copy settings  
Change copy quality  
The following copy-quality settings are available:  
Auto Select: Use this setting when you are not concerned about the quality of the copy. This is  
the default setting.  
Mixed: Use this setting for documents that contain a mixture of text and graphics.  
Text: Use this setting for documents that contain mostly text.  
Picture: Use this setting for documents that contain mostly graphics.  
1. Load the document onto the scanner glass or  
into the document feeder.  
2. From the Home screen, touch the Copy  
button.  
3. Touch the Settings... button, and then scroll to  
and touch the Optimize button. Touch the  
arrow buttons to scroll through the options,  
and then touch an option to select it.  
4. Touch the Black or Color button to start  
copying.  
152  
Chapter 10 Copy  
ENWW  
     
Check the scanner glass for dirt and smudges  
Over time, specks of debris might collect on the scanner glass and white plastic backing, which can  
affect performance. This can cause vertical streaks on copy jobs from the document feeder, and  
specks on copy jobs from the flatbed scanner glass. Use the following procedure to clean the scanner  
glass and white plastic backing.  
1. Use the power switch to turn off the product,  
and then unplug the power cord from the  
electrical socket.  
2. Open the scanner lid.  
3. For specks on flatbed copy jobs, clean the  
scanner glass and the white plastic backing  
with a soft cloth or sponge that has been  
moistened with nonabrasive glass cleaner.  
For vertical streaks on document feeder copy  
jobs, clean the document feeder scanner strip  
on the left side of the product with a soft cloth  
or sponge that has been moistened with  
nonabrasive glass cleaner.  
CAUTION: Do not use abrasives, acetone,  
benzene, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, or carbon  
tetrachloride on any part of the product; these  
can damage the product. Do not place liquids  
directly on the glass or platen. They might  
seep and damage the product.  
4. Dry the glass and white plastic with a chamois  
or a cellulose sponge to prevent spotting.  
5. Plug in the product, and then use the power  
switch to turn on the product.  
Copy settings  
ENWW  
153  
   
Adjust the lightness or darkness for copies  
1. Load the document onto the scanner glass or  
into the document feeder.  
2. From the Home screen, touch the Copy  
button.  
3. On the summary screen, touch the arrow  
buttons to adjust the setting.  
4. Touch the Black or Color button to start  
copying.  
Define custom copy settings  
When you change the copy settings at the control panel, the custom settings remain in effect for  
approximately 2 minutes after the job completes, and then the product returns to the default settings.  
To immediately return to the defaults, press the Cancel  
button from the Home screen.  
Print or copy edge-to-edge  
The product cannot print fully edge-to-edge. The maximum printing area is 203.2 x 347 mm (8 x  
13.7 in), leaving a 4 mm unprintable border around the page.  
Considerations for printing or scanning documents with cropped edges:  
When the original is smaller than the output size, move the original 4 mm (1/6 inch) away from  
the corner indicated by the icon on the scanner. Recopy or scan in this position.  
When the original is the size of the desired output, use the Reduce/Enlarge feature to reduce the  
image so the copy is not cropped.  
154  
Chapter 10 Copy  
ENWW  
       
Set the paper size and type for copying on special paper  
1. From the Home screen, touch the Copy  
button.  
2. Touch the Settings... button, and then scroll to  
and touch the Paper button.  
3. From the list of paper sizes, touch the name  
of the paper size that is in Tray 1.  
4. From the list of paper types, touch the name  
of the paper type that is in Tray 1.  
5. Touch the Black or Color button to start  
copying.  
Restore copy default settings  
1. From the Home screen, touch the Copy  
button.  
2. Touch the Settings... button, and then scroll to  
and touch the Restore Defaults button.  
Copy settings  
ENWW  
155  
       
Copy photos  
NOTE: Copy photos from the scanner glass, not from the document feeder.  
1. Place the photo on the scanner glass, picture-side down at the upper left corner of the glass,  
and close the scanner lid.  
2. From the Home screen, touch the Copy button.  
3. Touch the Settings... button, and then touch the Optimize button.  
4. Touch the Picture button.  
5. Touch the Black or Color button to start copying.  
156  
Chapter 10 Copy  
ENWW  
   
Copy mixed size originals  
Use the scanner glass to make copies of mixed size originals.  
NOTE: You can use the document feeder to copy mixed size originals only if the pages share a  
common dimension. For example, you can combine Letter and Legal size pages because they have  
the same width. Stack the pages so the top edges are even with each other and so the pages have  
the same width but varying lengths.  
1. In Tray 1, load paper that is large enough for the largest page in the original document.  
2. Place one page of the original document face down in the upper left corner of the scanner glass.  
3. From the Home screen, touch the Copy button.  
4. Touch the Settings... button, and then scroll to and touch the Paper button.  
5. From the list of paper sizes, touch the name of the paper size that is loaded in Tray 1.  
6. From the list of paper types, touch the name of the paper type that is loaded in Tray 1.  
7. Touch the Black or Color button to start copying.  
8. Repeat these steps for each page.  
Copy mixed size originals  
ENWW  
157  
 
Copy on both sides  
Copy on both sides automatically (duplex models only)  
1. Load the first page of the document onto the  
scanner glass or into the document feeder.  
2. From the Home screen, touch the Copy  
button.  
3. Touch the Settings... button, and then open  
the Two Sided menu.  
4. Select the duplexing option that you want to  
use. For example, to copy a two-sided original  
with two-sided output, select the 2-Sided to 2-  
Sided option.  
5. Touch the Black or Color button to start  
copying.  
158  
Chapter 10 Copy  
ENWW  
     
Copy on both sides manually  
1. Load the first page of the document onto the  
scanner glass or into the document feeder.  
2. From the Home screen, touch the Copy  
button.  
3. Touch the Black or Color button to start  
copying.  
4. Remove the printed copy from the output bin,  
and load the pages into Tray 1 with the  
printed side down and the top edge at the  
back of the tray.  
Copy on both sides  
ENWW  
159  
   
5. Load the next page of the document onto the  
scanner glass or into the document feeder.  
6. From the Home screen, touch the Copy  
button.  
7. Touch the Black or Color button to start  
copying.  
8. Repeat these steps until the copy is complete.  
160  
Chapter 10 Copy  
ENWW  
11 Scan  
ENWW  
161  
 
Use scan functions  
Use the product to scan a document from the scanner glass or document feeder. For duplex models,  
you can also create two-sided scans.  
Scan methods  
Perform scan jobs in the following ways.  
Scan to a USB flash drive from the product control panel.  
Scan from the computer by using HP Scan software  
Scan from TWAIN-compliant or Windows Imaging Application (WIA)-compliant software  
NOTE: To learn about and use text-recognition software, install the Readiris program from the  
software CD. Text-recognition software is also known as optical character recognition (OCR)  
software.  
Scan to a USB flash drive  
1. Load the document onto the scanner glass or into the document feeder.  
2. Insert a USB flash drive into the port on the front of the product.  
3. From the Home screen, touch the Scan button.  
4. Touch the Scan to USB Drive screen.  
5. Touch the Scan button to scan and save the file. The product creates a folder named HP on the  
USB drive, and it saves the file in .PDF or .JPG format using an automatically generated file  
name.  
NOTE: When the summary screen opens, you can touch it to adjust settings.  
Scan by using HP Scan software (Windows)  
1. Double-click the HP Scan icon on the computer desktop.  
2. Select a scanning shortcut, and adjust the settings if necessary.  
3. Click Scan.  
NOTE: Click Advanced Settings to gain access to more options.  
Click Create New Shortcut to create a customized set of settings and save it in the list of shortcuts.  
Scan by using other software  
The product is TWAIN-compliant and Windows Imaging Application (WIA)-compliant. The product  
works with Windows-based programs that support TWAIN-compliant or WIA-compliant scanning  
devices and with Macintosh-based programs that support TWAIN-compliant scanning devices.  
162  
Chapter 11 Scan  
ENWW  
         
While you are in a TWAIN-compliant or WIA-compliant program, you can gain access to the scanning  
feature and scan an image directly into the open program. For more information, see the Help file or  
the documentation that came with your TWAIN-compliant or WIA-compliant software program.  
Scan from a TWAIN-compliant program  
Generally, a software program is TWAIN-compliant if it has a command such as Acquire, File  
Acquire, Scan, Import New Object, Insert from, or Scanner. If you are unsure whether the  
program is compliant or you do not know what the command is called, see the software program Help  
or documentation.  
When scanning from a TWAIN-compliant program, the HP Scan software program might start  
automatically. If the HP Scan program starts, you can make changes while previewing the image. If  
the program does not start automatically, the image goes to the TWAIN-compliant program  
immediately.  
Start the scan from within the TWAIN-compliant program. See the software program Help or  
documentation for information about the commands and steps to use.  
Scan from a WIA-compliant program  
WIA is another way to scan an image directly into a software program. WIA uses Microsoft software  
to scan, instead of the HP Scan software.  
Generally, a software program is WIA-compliant if it has a command such as Picture/From Scanner  
or Camera in the Insert or File menu. If you are unsure whether the program is WIA-compliant, see  
the software program Help or documentation.  
Start the scan from within the WIA-compliant program. See the software program Help or  
documentation for information about the commands and steps to use.  
-Or-  
From the Windows control panel, in the Cameras and Scanner folder (located inside the Hardware  
and Sound folder for Windows Vista and Windows 7), double-click the product icon. This opens the  
standard Microsoft WIA Wizard, which enables you to scan to a file.  
Scan by using optical character recognition (OCR) software  
To import scanned text into your preferred word-processing program for editing, open the HP Scan  
software and select the shortcut named Save as Editable Text (OCR).  
You can also use third-party OCR software. The Readiris OCR program is included on a separate CD  
that shipped with the product. To use the Readiris program, install it from the appropriate software  
CD, and then follow the instructions in the online Help.  
Cancel a scan  
To cancel a scan job, use one of the following procedures.  
On the product control panel, touch the Cancel  
button.  
Click the Cancel button in the on-screen dialog box.  
Use scan functions  
ENWW  
163  
       
Scan settings  
Scanner resolution and color  
If you are printing a scanned image, and the quality is not what you expected, you might have  
selected a resolution or color setting in the scanner software that does not match your needs.  
Resolution and color affect the following features of scanned images:  
Image clarity  
Texture of gradations (smooth or rough)  
Scan time  
File size  
Scanning resolution is measured in pixels per inch (ppi).  
NOTE: Scanning ppi levels are not interchangeable with printing dpi (dots per inch) levels.  
Color, grayscale, and black and white define the number of colors possible. You can adjust the  
scanner hardware resolution to up to 1200 ppi.  
The resolution and color guidelines table lists simple tips that you can follow to meet your scanning  
needs.  
NOTE: Setting the resolution and color to a high value can create large files that take up disk space  
and slow the scanning process. Before setting the resolution and color, determine how you are going  
to use the scanned image.  
164  
Chapter 11 Scan  
ENWW  
       
Resolution and color guidelines  
The following table describes the recommended resolution and color settings for different types of  
scan jobs.  
NOTE: The default resolution is 200 ppi.  
Intended use  
Fax  
Recommended resolution  
Recommended color settings  
150 ppi  
150 ppi  
Black and White  
E-mail  
Black and White, if the image does not require  
smooth gradation  
Grayscale, if the image requires smooth  
gradation  
Color, if the image is in color  
Black and White  
Edit text  
300 ppi  
Print (graphics or text)  
600 ppi for complex graphics, or if you  
want to significantly enlarge the  
document  
Black and White for text and line art  
Grayscale for shaded or colored graphics and  
photos  
300 ppi for normal graphics and text  
150 ppi for photos  
Color, if the image is in color  
Display on screen  
75 ppi  
Black and White for text  
Grayscale for graphics and photos  
Color, if the image is in color  
Color  
You can set the color values to the following settings when scanning.  
Setting  
Recommended use  
Color  
Use this setting for high-quality color photos or documents in which the color is  
important.  
Black and White  
Grayscale  
Use this setting for text documents.  
Use this setting when file size is an issue or when you want to scan a document or  
photograph quickly.  
Scan settings  
ENWW  
165  
   
Scan quality  
Over time, specks of debris might collect on the scanner glass and white plastic backing, which can  
affect performance. Use the following procedure to clean the scanner glass and white plastic backing.  
1. Use the power switch to turn off the product,  
and then unplug the power cord from the  
electrical socket.  
2. Open the scanner lid.  
3. Clean the scanner glass and the white plastic  
backing with a soft cloth or sponge that has  
been moistened with nonabrasive glass  
cleaner.  
CAUTION: Do not use abrasives, acetone,  
benzene, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, or carbon  
tetrachloride on any part of the product; these  
can damage the product. Do not place liquids  
directly on the glass or platen. They might  
seep and damage the product.  
4. Dry the glass and white plastic with a chamois  
or a cellulose sponge to prevent spotting.  
5. Plug in the product, and then use the power  
switch to turn on the product.  
166  
Chapter 11 Scan  
ENWW  
   
Scan a photo  
1. Place the photo on the scanner glass, picture-side down at the upper left corner of the glass,  
and close the scanner lid.  
2. Insert a USB flash drive into the port on the front of the product.  
3. From the Home screen, touch the Scan button.  
4. Touch the Scan to USB Drive button. The control panel shows a summary of scan settings.  
Touch this screen to adjust any settings.  
5. Touch the Scan button to scan the document and save it in a folder on the USB flash drive.  
Scan a photo  
ENWW  
167  
   
168  
Chapter 11 Scan  
ENWW  
Set up fax  
Install and connect the hardware  
Connect fax to a telephone line  
Connect the telephone cable provided with the product to the fax “line in” port  
and to the telephone jack on the wall.  
on the product  
The product is an analog faxing device. HP recommends using the product on a dedicated analog  
telephone line. If you are using a digital environment, such as DSL, PBX, ISDN, or VoIP, make sure  
to use the correct filters and configure the digital settings correctly. For more information, contact your  
digital service provider.  
NOTE: Some countries/regions might require an adapter to the phone cord that came with the  
product.  
Connect additional devices  
The product includes two fax ports:  
The fax “line in” port , which connects the product to the wall telephone jack.  
The fax “telephone line out” port , which connects additional devices to the product.  
Telephones used in conjunction with the product can be employed in two ways:  
An extension phone is a phone plugged into the same phone line at another location.  
A downstream phone is one that is plugged into the product or a device that is plugged into the  
product.  
Connect additional devices in the order that is described in the following steps. The output port for  
each device is connected to the input port of the next, forming a "chain". If you do not want to connect  
a specific device, skip the step that explains it and continue to the next device.  
NOTE: Do not connect more than three devices to the telephone line.  
NOTE: Voicemail is not supported with this product.  
1. Unplug the power cords for all of the devices that you want to connect.  
2. If the product is not yet connected to a telephone line, see the product installation guide before  
proceeding. The product should already be connected to a telephone jack.  
170  
Chapter 12 Fax  
ENWW  
   
3. Remove the plastic insert from the "telephone line out" port (the port that is marked with the  
telephone icon).  
Set up fax  
ENWW  
171  
4. To connect an internal or external modem on a computer, plug one end of a telephone cord into  
the product “telephone line out” port  
“line in” port.  
. Plug the other end of the telephone cord into the fax  
NOTE: Some modems have a second “line” port to connect to a dedicated voice line. If you  
have two “line” ports, see your modem documentation to make sure that you connect to the  
correct “line” port.  
5. To connect a caller-ID box, plug a telephone cord into the previous device’s “telephone” port.  
Plug the other end of the telephone cord into the caller-ID box “line” port.  
172  
Chapter 12 Fax  
ENWW  
   
6. To connect an answering machine, plug a telephone cord into the previous device’s “telephone”  
port. Plug the other end of the telephone cord into the answering machine “line” port.  
7. To connect a telephone, plug a telephone cord into the previous device’s “telephone” port. Plug  
the other end of the telephone cord into the telephone “line” port.  
8. After you have finished connecting additional devices, plug all of the devices into their power  
sources.  
Set up fax with a telephone answering machine  
Set the product rings-to-answer setting for at least one ring more than the number of rings for  
which the answering machine is set.  
If an answering machine is connected to the same telephone line but on a different jack (in  
another room, for example), it might interfere with the product's ability to receive faxes.  
Set up fax with an extension phone  
With this setting turned on, you can alert the product to pick up the incoming fax call by pressing  
1-2-3 sequentially on the telephone keypad. The default setting is On. Turn this setting off only if you  
use pulse dialing or if you have a service from your telephone company that also uses the 1-2-3  
sequence. The telephone company service does not work if it conflicts with the product.  
1.  
On the control panel, touch the Setup  
button.  
2. Scroll to and touch the Fax Setup menu.  
3. Scroll to and touch the Advanced Setup button.  
4. Scroll to and touch the Extension Phone button, and touch the On button.  
Set up fax  
ENWW  
173  
     
Setup for stand-alone fax  
1. Unpack and set up the product.  
2.  
From the Home screen, touch the Setup  
button.  
3. Touch the Fax Setup menu.  
4. Touch the Fax Set-Up Utility button.  
5. Follow the on-screen prompts and select the appropriate response for each question.  
NOTE: The maximum number of characters for the fax number is 20.  
NOTE: The maximum number of characters for the fax header is 25.  
Configure fax settings  
You can configure the product fax settings from the control panel, the Fax Setup Wizard (if the  
software is installed), HP Device Toolbox (if the software is installed), or from the HP Embedded Web  
Server (if the product is connected to a network).  
In the United States and many other countries/regions, setting the time, date, and other fax header  
information is a legal requirement.  
Use the control panel to set the fax time, date, and header  
To use the control panel to set the date, time, and header, complete the following steps:  
1.  
From the Home screen, touch the Setup  
button.  
2. Touch the Fax Setup menu.  
3. Touch the Basic Setup menu.  
4. Scroll to and touch the Time/Date button.  
5. Select the 12-hour clock or 24-hour clock.  
6. Use the keypad to enter the current time, and then touch the OK button.  
7. Select the date format.  
8. Use the keypad to enter the current date, and then touch the OK button.  
9. Touch the Fax Header menu.  
10. Use the keypad to enter your fax number, and then touch the OK button.  
NOTE: The maximum number of characters for the fax number is 20.  
11. Use the keypad to enter your company name or header, and then touch the OK button.  
NOTE: The maximum number of characters for the fax header is 25.  
174  
Chapter 12 Fax  
ENWW  
   
Use of common localized letters in fax headers  
When using the control panel to enter your name in the header or to enter a name for a one-touch  
key, speed-dial entry, or group-dial entry, touch the 123 button to open a keypad that contains special  
characters.  
Use the HP Fax Setup Wizard  
If you did not complete the fax setup process at the time you installed the software, you can complete  
it at any time by using the HP Fax Setup Wizard.  
1. Click Start, and then click Programs.  
2. Click HP, click the name of the product, and then click HP Fax Setup Wizard.  
3. Follow the onscreen instructions in the HP Fax Setup Wizard to configure the fax settings.  
Set up fax  
ENWW  
175  
   
Use the phone book  
You can store frequently dialed fax numbers (up to 120 entries) either as individual fax numbers or as  
groups of fax numbers.  
Use the control panel to create and edit the fax phone book  
1. From the Home screen, touch the Fax button.  
2. Touch the Fax Menu button.  
3. Touch the Phone Book Setup button.  
4. Touch the Individual Setup button to create a  
speed dial entry.  
5. Touch an unassigned number from the list.  
6. Use the keypad to enter a name for the entry,  
and then touch the OK button.  
7. Use the keypad to enter the fax number for  
the entry, and then touch the OK button.  
Import or export Microsoft Outlook contacts into the fax phone book  
1. Type the product IP address into the address line of a Web browser to open the HP Embedded  
Web Server.  
2. Click the Fax tab, and then click the Fax Phone Book option.  
3. Browse to the program phone book, and then click the Import/Export Phone Book option.  
Use phone-book data from other programs  
NOTE: Before a phone book from another program can be imported, you must use the export  
feature in that other program.  
HP ToolboxFX can import contact information from the following software program phone books.  
Microsoft Outlook  
Lotus Notes  
Microsoft Outlook Express  
A phone book previously exported from another HP product's ToolboxFX software.  
176  
Chapter 12 Fax  
ENWW  
         
Delete phone book entries  
You can delete all phone book entries that are programmed in the product.  
CAUTION: After phone book entries are deleted, they cannot be recovered.  
1. From the Home screen, touch the Fax button.  
2. Touch the Fax Menu button.  
3. Touch the Phone Book Setup button.  
4. Touch the Delete Entry button. Or, to delete  
all the entries, touch the Delete All Entries  
button.  
5. Touch the entry that you want to delete.  
Use speed dials  
Create and edit speed-dial entries  
1. From the Home screen, touch the Fax button.  
2. Touch the Fax Menu button.  
3. Touch the Phone Book Setup button.  
4. Touch the Individual Setup button.  
5. Touch an unassigned number from the list.  
6. Use the keypad to enter a name for the entry,  
and then touch the OK button.  
7. Use the keypad to enter the fax number for  
the entry, and then touch the OK button.  
Use the phone book  
ENWW  
177  
       
Delete speed-dial entries  
1. From the Home screen, touch the Fax button.  
2. Touch the Fax Menu button.  
3. Touch the Phone Book Setup button.  
4. Touch the Delete Entry button. Or, to delete  
all the entries, touch the Delete All Entries  
button.  
5. Touch the entry that you want to delete.  
Manage group-dial entries  
Create and edit group-dial entries  
1. Create an individual entry for each fax number that you want in the group.  
a. From the Home screen, touch the Fax button.  
b. Touch the Fax Menu button.  
c. Touch the Phone Book Setup button.  
d. Touch the Individual Setup button.  
e. Touch an unassigned number from the list.  
f.  
Use the keypad to enter a name for the entry, and then touch the OK button.  
g. Use the keypad to enter the fax number for the entry, and then touch the OK button.  
2. From the Phone Book Setup menu, touch the Group Setup button.  
3. Touch an unassigned number from the list.  
4. Use the keypad to enter a name for the group, and then touch the OK button.  
5. Touch the name of each individual entry that you want to include in the group. When you are  
finished, touch the Done Selecting button.  
Delete group-dial entries  
1. From the Home screen, touch the Fax button.  
2. Touch the Fax Menu button.  
178  
Chapter 12 Fax  
ENWW  
       
3. Touch the Phone Book Setup button.  
4. Touch the Delete Entry button. Or, to delete all the entries, touch the Delete All Entries button.  
5. Touch the entry that you want to delete.  
Use the phone book  
ENWW  
179  
Set fax settings  
Send fax settings  
Set special dialing symbols and options  
You can insert pauses into a fax number that you are dialing. Pauses are often needed when dialing  
internationally or connecting to an outside line.  
Special symbol  
Button  
Description  
Dialing pause  
The Redial/Pause button is available on the control panel keypad for  
entering a fax number. You can also touch the comma button to insert a  
dialing pause.  
Pause for dial tone  
Hook flash  
The W button is available only when you are entering the fax number for  
a phone book entry. This character causes the product to wait for a dial  
tone before dialing the remainder of the telephone number.  
The R button is available only when you are entering the fax number for a  
phone book entry. This character causes the product to insert a hook  
flash.  
Set a dialing prefix  
A dial prefix is a number or group of numbers that are automatically added to the beginning of every  
fax number you enter at the control panel or from the software. The maximum number of characters  
for a dial prefix is 50.  
The default setting is Off. You might want to turn this setting on and enter a prefix if, for example, you  
have to dial a number such as 9 to get a telephone line outside of your company telephone system.  
While this setting is active, you can dial a fax number without the dial prefix by using manual dial.  
1.  
From the Home screen, touch the Setup  
button.  
2. Touch the Fax Setup menu.  
3. Touch the Basic Setup menu.  
4. Scroll to and touch the Dial Prefix button, and then touch the On button.  
5. Use the keypad to enter the prefix, and then touch the OK button. You can use numbers,  
pauses, and dialing symbols.  
Set the dial-tone detection  
Normally, the product begins dialing a fax number immediately. If you are using the product on the  
same line as your telephone, turn on the detect-dial-tone setting. This prevents the product from  
sending a fax while someone is on the telephone.  
180  
Chapter 12 Fax  
ENWW  
         
The factory-set default for detect dial tone is On for France and Hungary, and Off for all other  
countries/regions.  
1.  
From the Home screen, touch the Setup  
button.  
2. Touch the Fax Setup menu.  
3. Touch the Advanced Setup menu.  
4. Scroll to and touch the Detect Dial Tone button, and then touch the On button.  
Set tone-dialing or pulse-dialing  
Use this procedure to set the product to tone-dialing or pulse-dialing mode. The factory-set default is  
Tone. Do not change this setting unless you know that the telephone line cannot use tone dialing.  
NOTE: The pulse-dialing option is not available in all countries/regions.  
1.  
From the Home screen, touch the Setup  
button.  
2. Touch the Fax Setup menu.  
3. Touch the Advanced Setup menu.  
4. Scroll to and touch the Dialing Mode button, and then touch the Tone or Pulse button.  
Set autoredial and the time between redials  
If the product was unable to send a fax because the receiving fax machine did not answer or was  
busy, the product attempts to redial based on the redial-on-busy, redial-on-no-answer, and redial-on-  
communication-error options.  
Set the redial-on-busy option  
If this option is on, the product redials automatically if it receives a busy signal. The factory-set default  
for the redial-on-busy option is On.  
1.  
From the Home screen, touch the Setup  
button.  
2. Touch the Fax Setup menu.  
3. Touch the Advanced Setup menu.  
4. Scroll to and touch the Redial if Busy button, and then touch the On button.  
Set the redial-on-no-answer option  
If this option is on, the product redials automatically if the receiving machine does not answer. The  
factory-set default for the redial-on-no-answer option is Off.  
1.  
From the Home screen, touch the Setup  
button.  
2. Touch the Fax Setup menu.  
Set fax settings  
ENWW  
181  
   
3. Touch the Advanced Setup menu.  
4. Scroll to and touch the Redial if No Answer button, and then touch the On button.  
Set the redial-on-communication-error option  
If this option is on, the product redials automatically if some sort of communication error occurs. The  
factory-set default for the redial-on-communication-error option is On.  
1.  
From the Home screen, touch the Setup  
button.  
2. Touch the Fax Setup menu.  
3. Touch the Advanced Setup menu.  
4. Scroll to and touch the Redial if Comm. Error button, and then touch the On button.  
Set light/dark and resolution  
Set the default light/dark (contrast) setting  
The contrast affects the lightness and darkness of an outgoing fax as it is being sent.  
The default light/dark setting is the contrast that is normally applied to items that are being faxed. The  
slider is set to the middle as the default setting.  
1.  
From the Home screen, touch the Setup  
button.  
2. Touch the Fax Setup menu.  
3. Touch the Advanced Setup menu.  
4. Touch the Lighter/Darker button, and then touch one of the arrows to adjust the slider.  
Set resolution settings  
NOTE: Increasing the resolution increases the fax size. Larger faxes increase the send time and  
could exceed the available memory in the product.  
Use this procedure to change the default resolution for all fax jobs to one of the following settings:  
Standard: This setting provides the lowest quality and the fastest transmission time.  
Fine: This setting provides a higher resolution quality than Standard that is usually appropriate  
for text documents.  
Superfine: This setting is best used for documents that mix text and images. The transmission  
time is slower than the Fine setting but faster than the Photo setting.  
Photo: This setting produces the best images, but greatly increases the transmission time.  
The factory-set default resolution setting is Fine.  
182  
Chapter 12 Fax  
ENWW  
   
Set the default resolution setting  
1.  
From the Home screen, touch the Setup  
button.  
2. Touch the Fax Setup menu.  
3. Touch the Advanced Setup menu.  
4. Touch the Fax Resolution button, and then touch one of the options.  
Cover-page templates  
Several business and personal fax cover-page templates are available in the PC Fax Send software  
program.  
NOTE: You cannot alter cover-sheet templates, but you can edit the fields within the templates.  
Set billing codes  
If the billing codes feature is on, the product prompts you to enter a billing code for each fax. The  
product increases the billing code count for each sent fax page. This includes all types of faxes  
except for poll-received, fax-forwarded, or computer-downloaded faxes. For an undefined group or a  
group-dial fax, the product increases the billing code count for each successful fax that is sent to each  
destination.  
The factory-set default for the billing-code setting is Off. The billing code can be any number from 1  
through 250.  
Set the billing-code setting  
1.  
From the Home screen, touch the Setup  
button.  
2. Touch the Fax Setup menu.  
3. Touch the Advanced Setup menu.  
4. Scroll to and touch the Billing Codes button, and then touch the On button.  
Use billing codes  
1. Load the document in the document feeder or on the scanner glass.  
2. From the Home screen, touch the Fax button.  
3. Enter the fax number, or select a speed-dial or group-dial entry.  
4. Touch the Start Fax button.  
5. Enter the billing code, and then touch the OK button.  
Print the billing-code report  
The billing-code report is a printed list of all the fax billing codes and the total number of faxes billed  
to each code.  
Set fax settings  
ENWW  
183  
 
NOTE: After the product prints this report, it deletes all billing data.  
1. From the Home screen, touch the Fax button.  
2. Touch the Fax Menu button.  
3. Touch the Fax Reports button.  
4. Scroll to and touch the Print Billing Report button.  
Receive fax settings  
Set fax forwarding  
You can set your product to forward incoming faxes to another fax number. When the fax arrives at  
your product, it is stored in the memory. The product then dials the fax number that you have  
specified and sends the fax. If the product cannot forward a fax because of an error (for example, the  
number is busy) and repeated redial attempts are unsuccessful, your product prints the fax.  
If the product runs out of memory while receiving a fax, it terminates the incoming fax and only  
forwards the pages and partial pages that have been stored in the memory.  
When it is using the fax-forwarding feature, the product (rather than the computer) must be receiving  
the faxes, and the answer mode must be set to Automatic.  
1. From the Home screen, touch the Fax button.  
2. Touch the Fax Menu button.  
3. Touch the Receive Options button.  
4. Touch the Forward Fax button, and touch the On button.  
5. Use the keypad to enter the fax-forwarding number, and then touch the OK button.  
Set the answer mode  
Depending on the situation, set the product answer mode to Automatic, TAM, Fax/Tel, or Manual.  
The factory-set default is Automatic.  
Automatic: The product answers incoming calls after a specified number of rings or upon  
recognition of special fax tones.  
TAM: The product does not automatically answer the call. Instead, it waits until it detects the fax  
tone.  
Fax/Tel: The product answers incoming calls immediately. If it detects the fax tone, it processes  
the call as a fax. If it does not detect the fax tone, it creates an audible ring to alert you to answer  
the incoming voice call.  
Manual: The product never answers calls. You must start the fax-receiving process yourself,  
either by touching the Start Fax button on the control panel or by picking up a telephone that is  
connected to that line and dialing 1-2-3.  
184  
Chapter 12 Fax  
ENWW  
     
To set or change the answer mode, complete the following steps:  
1.  
From the Home screen, touch the Setup  
button.  
2. Touch the Fax Setup menu.  
3. Touch the Basic Setup menu.  
4. Scroll to and touch the Answer Mode button, and then touch the name of the option that you  
want to use.  
Block or unblock fax numbers  
If you do not want to receive faxes from specific people or businesses, you can block as many as 30  
fax numbers by using the control panel. When you block a fax number and someone from that  
number sends you a fax, the control-panel display indicates that the number is blocked, the fax does  
not print, and the fax is not saved in memory. Faxes from blocked fax numbers appear in the fax  
activity log with a “discarded” designation. You can unblock blocked fax numbers individually or all at  
one time.  
NOTE: The sender of a blocked fax is not notified that the fax failed.  
1. From the Home screen, touch the Fax button.  
2. Touch the Fax Menu button.  
3. Touch the Receive Options button.  
4. Touch the Block Junk Faxes button.  
5. Touch the Add Number button.  
6. Use the keypad to enter the fax number that you want to block, and then touch the OK button.  
Set the number of rings-to-answer  
When the answer mode is set to Automatic, the product rings-to-answer setting determines the  
number of times the telephone rings before the product answers an incoming call.  
If the product is connected to a line that receives both fax and voice calls (a shared line) and that also  
uses an answering machine, you might need to adjust the rings-to-answer setting. The number of  
rings-to-answer for the product must be greater than the rings-to-answer on the answering machine.  
This allows the answering machine to answer the incoming call and record a message if it is a voice  
call. When the answering machine answers the call, the product listens to the call and automatically  
answers it if it detects fax tones.  
The default setting for rings-to-answer is five for the U.S. and Canada, and two for other countries/  
regions.  
Use the following table to determine the number of rings-to-answer to use.  
Set fax settings  
ENWW  
185  
   
Type of telephone line  
Recommended rings-to-answer setting  
Dedicated fax line (receiving only fax calls)  
Set to a number of rings within the range shown on the  
control-panel display. (The minimum and maximum number  
of rings allowed varies by country/region.)  
One line with two separate numbers and a ring-pattern  
service  
One or two rings. (If you have an answering machine or  
computer voicemail for the other telephone number, make  
sure that the product is set to a greater number of rings than  
the answering system. Also, use the distinctive-ring feature  
to differentiate between voice and fax calls.)  
Shared line (receiving both fax and voice calls) with only an  
attached telephone  
Five rings or more.  
Shared line (receiving both fax and voice calls) with an  
attached answering machine or computer voicemail  
Two rings more than the answering machine or computer  
voicemail.  
To set or change the number of rings-to-answer, use the following steps:  
1.  
From the Home screen, touch the Setup  
button.  
2. Touch the Fax Setup menu.  
3. Touch the Basic Setup menu.  
4. Touch the Rings to Answer button.  
5. Use the keypad to enter the number of rings, and then touch the OK button.  
Set distinctive ring  
Ring-pattern or distinctive-ring service is available through some local telephone companies. The  
service allows you to have more than one telephone number on a single line. Each telephone number  
has a unique ring pattern, so that you can answer voice calls and the product can answer fax calls.  
If you subscribe to a ring-pattern service with a telephone company, you must set the product to  
answer the correct ring pattern. Not all countries/regions support unique ring patterns. Contact the  
telephone company to determine if this service is available in your country/region.  
NOTE: If you do not have ring-pattern service and you change the ring-pattern settings to  
something other than the default, All Rings, the product might not be able to receive faxes.  
The settings are as follows:  
All Rings: The product answers any calls that come through the telephone line.  
Single: The product answers any calls that produce a single-ring pattern.  
Double: The product answers any calls that produce a double-ring pattern.  
Triple: The product answers any calls that produce a triple-ring pattern.  
Double and Triple: The product answers any calls that produce a double-ring or triple-ring  
pattern.  
186  
Chapter 12 Fax  
ENWW  
 
To change ring patterns for call answering, complete the following steps:  
1.  
From the Home screen, touch the Setup  
button.  
2. Touch the Fax Setup menu.  
3. Touch the Basic Setup menu.  
4. Touch the Distinctive Ring button, and then touch the name of an option.  
Use autoreduction for incoming faxes  
If the fit-to-page option is turned on, the product automatically reduces long faxes up to 75% to fit the  
information on the default paper size (for example, the fax is reduced from legal to letter size).  
If the fit-to-page option is turned off, long faxes print at full size on multiple pages. The factory-set  
default for incoming fax autoreduction is On.  
If you have the Stamp Faxes option turned on, you might also want to turn on autoreduction. This  
reduces the size of the incoming faxes slightly, and prevents the page-stamp from forcing a fax onto  
two pages.  
NOTE: Make sure that the default paper size setting matches the size of the paper in the tray.  
1.  
From the Home screen, touch the Setup  
button.  
2. Touch the Fax Setup menu.  
3. Touch the Advanced Setup menu.  
4. Touch the Fit to Page button, and then touch the On button.  
Set fax reprint settings  
1.  
From the Home screen, touch the Setup  
button.  
2. Touch the Fax Setup menu.  
3. Touch the Advanced Setup menu.  
4. Scroll to and touch the Allow Fax Reprint button, and then touch the On button.  
Set the fax sounds volume  
Control the volume of the fax sounds from the control panel. You can make changes to the following  
sounds:  
Alarm Volume  
Ring Volume  
Phone Line Volume  
Set fax settings  
ENWW  
187  
     
Set the alarm volume, phone-line volume, and ring volume  
1.  
From the Home screen, touch the Setup  
button.  
2. Touch the System Setup menu.  
3. Touch the Volume Settings menu.  
4. Touch the name of the volume setting that you want to adjust, and then touch one of the options.  
Repeat this step for each volume setting.  
Set stamp-received faxes  
The product prints the sender identification information at the top of each received fax. You can also  
stamp the incoming fax with your own header information to confirm the date and time that the fax  
was received. The factory-set default for stamp-received faxes is Off.  
NOTE: Turning on the stamp-received setting might increase the page size and cause the product  
to print a second page.  
NOTE: This option applies only to received faxes that the product prints.  
1.  
From the Home screen, touch the Setup  
button.  
2. Touch the Fax Setup menu.  
3. Touch the Advanced Setup menu.  
4. Scroll to and touch the Stamp Faxes button, and then touch the On button.  
Set the private receive feature  
When the private-receive feature is active, received faxes are stored in memory. A password is  
required to print the stored faxes.  
NOTE: When the product fax memory is full, the product cannot receive more fax jobs. If the private  
receive setting is enabled, make sure that the received faxes are checked and printed or deleted on a  
regular basis in order to avoid filling the fax memory.  
1.  
From the Home screen, touch the Setup  
button.  
2. Touch the Fax Setup menu.  
3. Touch the Advanced Setup menu.  
188  
Chapter 12 Fax  
ENWW  
   
4. Scroll to and touch the Private Receive button, and then touch the On button.  
5. If you have not already set a system password, the product prompts you to create one.  
NOTE: The system password is case-sensitive.  
a. Touch the OK button, and then use the keypad to enter the system password.  
b. Touch the OK button, confirm the password by entering it a second time, and then touch  
the OK button to save the password.  
Set fax polling  
If someone else has set up a fax to be polled, you can request that the fax be sent to your product.  
(This is known as polling another machine).  
1. From the Home screen, touch the Fax button.  
2. Touch the Fax Menu button.  
3. Touch the Receive Options button.  
4. Touch the Polling Receive button.  
5. Use the keypad to enter the number of the fax machine that you want to poll, and then touch the  
OK button.  
The product dials the other fax machine and requests the fax.  
Set fax settings  
ENWW  
189  
   
Use fax  
Fax software  
Supported fax programs  
The PC fax program that came with the product is the only PC fax program that works with the  
product. To continue to use a PC fax program previously installed on the computer, use the modem  
that is already connected to the computer; it will not function through the product modem.  
Cancel a fax  
Use these instructions to cancel a single fax that is currently dialing or a fax that is being transmitted  
or received.  
Cancel the current fax  
Press the Cancel  
canceled. Pressing the Cancel  
button on the control panel. Any pages that have not been transmitted are  
button also stops group-dial jobs.  
Cancel a pending fax job  
Use this procedure to cancel a fax job in the following situations:  
The product is waiting to redial after encountering a busy signal, an unanswered call, or a  
communication error.  
The fax is scheduled to be sent at a future time.  
Use the following steps to cancel a fax job by using the Fax Job Status menu:  
1. From the Home screen, touch the Fax button.  
2. Touch the Fax Menu button.  
3. Touch the Send Options button.  
4. Touch the Fax Job Status button.  
5. Touch the fax number for the job that you want to cancel.  
Use fax on a DSL, PBX, or ISDN system  
HP products are designed specifically for use with traditional analog phone services. They are not  
designed to work on DSL, PBX, ISDN lines, or VoIP services, but they can work with the proper  
filters, setup, and equipment from a digital services provider.  
NOTE: HP recommends discussing DSL, PBX, ISDN, and VoIP setup options with the service  
provider.  
190  
Chapter 12 Fax  
ENWW  
           
The HP LaserJet product is an analog device that is not compatible with all digital phone  
environments (unless a digital-to-analog converter is used). HP does not guarantee that the product  
will be compatible with digital environments or digital-to-analog converters.  
DSL  
A digital subscriber line (DSL) uses digital technology over standard copper telephone wires. This  
product is not directly compatible with those digital signals. However, if the configuration is specified  
during DSL setup, the signal can be separated so that some of the bandwidth is used to transmit an  
analog signal (for voice and fax) while the remaining bandwidth is used to transmit digital data.  
NOTE: Not all faxes are compatible with DSL services. HP does not guarantee that the product will  
be compatible with all DSL service lines or providers.  
A typical DSL modem employs a filter to separate the higher frequency DSL modem communication  
from lower frequency analog phone and fax modem communication. It is often necessary to use a  
filter with analog phones and analog fax products that are connected to a telephone line used by a  
DSL modem. The DSL service provider usually provides this filter. Contact the DSL provider for more  
information or for assistance.  
PBX  
The product is an analog device that is not compatible in all digital phone environments. Digital-to-  
analog filters or converters may be needed for faxing functionality. If faxing issues occur in a PBX  
environment, it might be necessary to contact the PBX provider for assistance. HP does not  
guarantee that the product will be compatible with digital environments or digital-to-analog converters.  
Contact the PBX provider for more information and for assistance.  
ISDN  
The product is an analog device that is not compatible in all digital phone environments. Digital-to-  
analog filters or converters may be needed for faxing functionality. If faxing issues occur in an ISDN  
environment, it might be necessary to contact the ISDN provider for assistance. HP does not  
guarantee that the product will be compatible with ISDN digital environments or digital-to-analog  
converters.  
Use fax on a VoIP service  
Voice over internet protocol (VoIP) services are often not compatible with fax machines unless the  
provider explicitly states that it supports fax over IP services.  
If the product experiences problems getting a fax to work on a VoIP network, verify that all cables and  
settings are correct. Decreasing the fax-speed setting might allow the product to send a fax over a  
VoIP network.  
If the VoIP provider offers a "Pass through" mode for the connection, that will offer better fax  
performance on VoIP. Also if the provider has "comfort noise" added to the line, fax performance can  
be enhanced if this feature is not enabled.  
If faxing problems continue, contact the VoIP provider.  
Use fax  
ENWW  
191  
   
Fax memory  
Fax memory contents are retained when there is a loss of power  
The flash memory protects against data loss when a power failure occurs. Other fax devices store fax  
pages in either normal RAM or short-term RAM. Normal RAM immediately loses data when power is  
lost, while short-term RAM loses data about 60 minutes after a power failure occurs. Flash memory  
can maintain its data for years without power applied.  
Delete faxes from memory  
Use this procedure only if you are concerned that someone else has access to your product and  
might try to reprint faxes from the memory.  
CAUTION: In addition to clearing the reprint memory, this procedure clears any fax that is currently  
being sent, unsent faxes that are pending redial, faxes that are scheduled to be sent at a future time,  
and faxes that are not printed or forwarded.  
1.  
From the Home screen, touch the Setup  
button.  
2. Touch the Service menu.  
3. Touch the Fax Service menu.  
4. Touch the Clear Saved Faxes button.  
Send a fax  
Fax from the flatbed scanner  
1. Place the document face-down on the  
scanner glass.  
2. From the Home screen, touch the Fax button.  
3. Use the keypad to type the fax number.  
4. Touch the Start Fax button.  
192  
Chapter 12 Fax  
ENWW  
       
5. The product prompts you to confirm that you  
are sending from the scanner glass. Touch  
the Yes button.  
6. The product prompts you to load the first  
page. Touch the OK button.  
7. The product scans the first page and then  
prompts you to load another page. If the  
document has multiple pages, touch the Yes  
button. Continue this process until you have  
scanned all the pages.  
8. When you have scanned the last page, touch  
the No button at the prompt. The product  
sends the fax.  
Fax from the document feeder  
1. Insert the originals into the document feeder  
face-up.  
NOTE: The document feeder capacity is up  
to 50 sheets of 75 g/m2 or 20 lb paper.  
CAUTION: To prevent damage to the  
product, do not use an original that contains  
correction tape, correction fluid, paper clips,  
or staples. Also, do not load photographs,  
small originals, or fragile originals into the  
document feeder.  
2. Adjust the paper guides until they are snug  
against the paper.  
3. From the Home screen, touch the Fax button.  
Use fax  
ENWW  
193  
4. Use the keypad to type the fax number.  
5. Touch the Start Fax button.  
Use speed dials and group-dial entries  
1. Load the document into the document feeder or onto the scanner glass.  
2. From the Home screen, touch the Fax button.  
3. On the keypad, touch the fax phone book icon.  
4. Touch the name of the individual or group entry that you want to use.  
5. Touch the Start Fax button.  
194  
Chapter 12 Fax  
ENWW  
 
Send a fax from the software  
The following information provides basic instructions for sending faxes by using the software that  
came with the product. All other software-related topics are covered in the software Help, which can  
be opened from the software-program Help menu.  
You can fax electronic documents from a computer if you meet the following requirements:  
The product is connected directly to the computer or to a network to which the computer is  
connected.  
The product software is installed on the computer.  
The computer operating system is one that this product supports.  
Send a fax from the software  
The procedure to send a fax varies according to your specifications. The most typical steps follow.  
1. Click Start, click Programs (or All Programs in Windows XP), and then click HP.  
2. Click the product name, and then click Send fax. The fax software opens.  
3. Enter the fax number of one or more recipients.  
4. Load the document in the document feeder.  
5. Click Send Now.  
Send a fax from a third-party software program, such as Microsoft Word  
1. Open a document in a third-party program.  
2. Click the File menu, and then click Print.  
3. Select the fax print driver from the printer driver drop-down list. The fax software opens.  
4. Enter the fax number of one or more recipients.  
5. Include any pages loaded at the product. This step is optional.  
6. Click Send Now.  
Use fax  
ENWW  
195  
     
Send a fax by dialing from a telephone connected to the fax line  
Occasionally, you might want to dial a fax number from a telephone that is connected to the same line  
as the product. For example, if you are sending a fax to a person whose device is in the manual  
receive mode, you can precede the fax with a voice call to let that person know that the fax is coming.  
NOTE: The telephone must be connected to the product "telephone" port  
.
1. Load the document into the document feeder.  
2. From the Home screen, touch the Fax button.  
3. Pick up the handset of a telephone that is connected to the same line as the product. Dial the fax  
number by using the telephone keypad.  
4. When the recipient answers, instruct the person to start the fax machine.  
5. When you hear the fax tones, touch the Start Fax button on the control panel, wait until  
Connecting appears on the control panel display, and then hang up the telephone.  
Send a fax with confirmation  
You can set the product so that it prompts you to enter the fax number a second time to confirm that  
you are sending the fax to the correct number.  
1.  
From the Home screen, touch the Setup  
button.  
2. Touch the Fax Setup menu.  
3. Touch the Advanced Setup menu.  
4. Scroll to and touch the Confirm Fax Number button, and touch the On button.  
5. Send the fax.  
Schedule a fax to be sent later  
Use the product control panel to schedule a fax to be sent automatically at a future time to one or  
more people. When this procedure is completed, the product scans the document into memory and  
then returns to the Ready state.  
NOTE: If the product cannot transmit the fax at the scheduled time, that information is indicated on  
the fax error report (if that option is turned on) or recorded in the fax activity log. The transmittal might  
not be initiated because the fax-sending call is not answered, or because a busy signal stops the  
redial attempts.  
If a fax has been scheduled to be sent at a future time but it requires updating, send the additional  
information as another job. All faxes that are scheduled to go to the same fax number at the same  
time are delivered as individual faxes.  
196  
Chapter 12 Fax  
ENWW  
     
1. Load the document into the document feeder.  
2. From the Home screen, touch the Fax button.  
3. Touch the Fax Menu button.  
4. Touch the Send Options button.  
5. Touch the Send Fax Later button.  
6. Use the keypad to enter the time of day to  
send the fax. Touch the OK button.  
7. Use the keypad to enter the date to send the  
fax. Touch the OK button.  
8. Use the keypad to type the fax number.  
Touch the OK button. The product scans the  
document and saves the file in memory until  
the designated time.  
Use access codes, credit cards, or calling cards  
To use access codes, credit cards, or calling cards, dial manually to allow for pauses and dialing  
codes.  
Send faxes internationally  
To send a fax to an international destination, dial manually to allow for pauses and international  
dialing codes.  
Use fax  
ENWW  
197  
Receive a fax  
Print a fax  
When the product receives a fax transmission, it prints the fax (unless the private-receive feature is  
enabled) and also stores it automatically to flash memory.  
When a color print cartridge becomes very low, the product prints in black only to prevent fax  
interruptions. To configure the product to print in color and use the remaining toner in the print  
cartridge past very low, follow these steps:  
1.  
On the product control panel, touch the Setup  
button.  
button, and then touch the System Setup  
2. Touch the At Very Low button, and then touch the Color Cartridges button.  
3. Touch the Continue button.  
When you choose to replace the very low print cartridge, color printing resumes automatically.  
Print a stored fax when the private receive feature is on  
To print stored faxes, you must provide the product security password. After the product prints the  
stored faxes, the faxes are deleted from memory.  
1. From the Home screen, touch the Fax button.  
2. Touch the Fax Menu button.  
3. Touch the Receive Options button.  
4. Touch the Print Private Faxes button.  
5. Use the keypad to enter the product security password, and then touch the OK button.  
Reprint a fax  
When the Allow Fax Reprint feature is on, the product stores received faxes in memory. The product  
has about 3.2 MB of storage space, which holds about 250 pages.  
These faxes are stored continuously. Reprinting them does not clear them from the memory.  
Turn on the Allow Fax Reprint feature  
1.  
From the Home screen, touch the Setup  
button.  
2. Touch the Fax Setup menu.  
3. Touch the Advanced Setup menu.  
4. Scroll to and touch the Allow Fax Reprint button, and touch the On button.  
198  
Chapter 12 Fax  
ENWW  
       
Reprint faxes  
1. From the Home screen, touch the Fax button.  
2. Touch the Fax Menu button.  
3. Touch the Receive Options button.  
4. Touch the Reprint Faxes button.  
5. Touch the entry for the fax that you want to reprint.  
Receive faxes when fax tones are audible on the phone line  
If you have a telephone line that receives both fax and telephone calls, and you hear fax tones when  
you answer the telephone, you can start the receiving process in one of two ways:  
If you are close to the product, press the Start Fax button on the control panel.  
If not, press 1-2-3 in sequence on the telephone keypad, listen for fax transmission sounds, and  
then hang up.  
NOTE: In order for the second method to work, the Extension Phone setting must be set to Yes.  
Use fax  
ENWW  
199  
 
Solve fax problems  
Fax troubleshooting checklist  
Several possible fixes are available. After each recommended action, retry faxing to see if the  
problem is resolved.  
For best results during fax problem solving, make sure the line from the product is plugged  
directly into the wall phone port. Disconnect all other devices that are connected to the product.  
1. Verify that the telephone cord is plugged into the correct port on the back of the product.  
2. Check the phone line by using the fax test:  
a.  
On the control panel, open the Setup  
menu, and then open the Service menu.  
b. Select the Fax Service option.  
c. Select the Run Fax Test option. The product prints a fax test report.  
The report contains the following possible results:  
Pass: The report contains all of the current fax settings for review.  
Fail: The cord is in the wrong port. The report contains suggestions for how to resolve  
the issue.  
Fail : The phone line is not active. The report contains suggestions for how to resolve  
the issue.  
3. Verify that the product firmware is current:  
a. Print a configuration page from the control panel Reports menu to obtain the current  
firmware date code.  
b. Go to www.hp.com.  
1. Click the Support & Drivers link.  
2. Click the Download drivers and software (and firmware) link option.  
3. In the For product box, type the product model number, and then click the Go button.  
200  
Chapter 12 Fax  
ENWW  
     
4. Click the link for your operating system.  
5. Scroll to the Firmware section of the table.  
If the listed version matches the version on the configuration page, you have the  
most current version.  
If the versions are different, download the firmware upgrade and update the  
firmware on the product following the instructions onscreen.  
NOTE: The product must be connected to a computer with internet access to  
upgrade firmware.  
Resend the fax.  
4. Verify that the fax was set up when the product software was installed.  
From the computer, in the HP program folder, run the Fax Setup Utility.  
5. Verify that the telephone service supports analog fax.  
If using ISDN or digital PBX, contact your service provider for information about configuring  
to an analog fax line.  
If using a VoIP service, change the Fax Speed setting to Slow (V.29) or disable Fast (V.34)  
from the control panel. Ask if your service provider supports fax and for the recommended  
fax modem speed. Some companies might require an adapter.  
If using a DSL service, ensure that a filter is included on the phone line connection to the  
product. Contact the DSL service provider or purchase a DSL filter if you do not have one.  
If a DSL filter is installed, try another since these filters can be defective.  
6. If the error persists, find more detailed problem-solving solutions in the sections that follow this  
one.  
Solve fax problems  
ENWW  
201  
Fax error messages  
Alert and warning messages appear temporarily and might require you to acknowledge the message  
by touching the OK button to resume or by touching the Cancel button to cancel the job. With  
certain warnings, the job might not complete or the print quality might be affected. If the alert or  
warning message is related to printing and the auto-continue feature is on, the product will attempt to  
resume printing the job after the warning has appeared for 10 seconds without acknowledgement.  
Communication error.  
Description  
A fax communication error occurred between the product and the sender or receiver.  
Recommended action  
Allow the product to retry sending the fax. Unplug the product telephone cord from the wall, plug in a  
telephone, and try making a call. Plug the product phone cord into a jack for another phone line.  
Try a different phone cord.  
Set the Fax Speed option to the Slow (V.29) setting or disable the Fast (V.34) setting.  
Turn off the Error Correction feature to prevent automatic error correction.  
NOTE: Turning off the Error Correction feature can reduce image quality.  
Print the Fax Activity Log report from the control panel to determine if the error occurs with a specific  
fax number.  
If the error persists, contact HP. See www.hp.com/go/LJColorMFPM375 or www.hp.com/go/  
LJColorMFPM475 or the support flyer that came in the product box.  
Document feeder door is open. Canceled fax.  
Description  
The cover at the top of the document feeder is open, and the product cannot send the fax.  
Recommended action  
Close the cover, and send the fax again.  
Fax is busy. Canceled send.  
Description  
The fax line to which you were sending a fax was busy. The product has canceled sending the fax.  
Recommended action  
Call the recipient to ensure that the fax machine is on and ready.  
Check that you are dialing the correct fax number.  
202  
Chapter 12 Fax  
ENWW  
   
Check that the Redial if Busy option is enabled.  
Open the Service menu, and touch the Fax Service button. Touch the Run Fax Test button. This test  
verifies that the phone cord is connected to the correct port and that the phone line has a signal. The  
product prints a report with the results.  
If the error persists, contact HP. See www.hp.com/go/LJColorMFPM375 or www.hp.com/go/  
LJColorMFPM475 or the support flyer that came in the product box.  
Fax is busy. Redial pending.  
Description  
The fax line to which you were sending a fax was busy. The product automatically redials the busy  
number.  
Recommended action  
Allow the product to retry sending the fax.  
Call the recipient to ensure that the fax machine is on and ready.  
Check that you are dialing the correct fax number.  
Open the Service menu, and touch the Fax Service button. Touch the Run Fax Test button. This test  
verifies that the phone cord is connected to the correct port and that the phone line has a signal. The  
product prints a report with the results.  
If the error persists, contact HP. See www.hp.com/go/LJColorMFPM375 or www.hp.com/go/  
LJColorMFPM475 or the support flyer that came in the product box.  
Fax receive error.  
Description  
An error occurred while trying to receive a fax.  
Recommended action  
Ask the sender to resend the fax.  
Try faxing back to the sender or another fax machine.  
Check for a dial tone on the phone line by touching the Start Fax button.  
Check that the telephone cord is securely connected by unplugging and replugging the cord.  
Make sure that you are using the telephone cord that came with the product.  
Open the Service menu, and touch the Fax Service button. Touch the Run Fax Test button. This test  
verifies that the phone cord is connected to the correct port and that the phone line has a signal. The  
product prints a report with the results.  
Decrease the fax speed. Ask the sender to resend the fax.  
Turn off error-correction mode. Ask the sender to resend the fax.  
Solve fax problems  
ENWW  
203  
NOTE: Turning off error-correction mode can reduce the quality of the fax image.  
Connect the product to a different phone line.  
If the error persists, contact HP. See www.hp.com/go/LJColorMFPM375 or www.hp.com/go/  
LJColorMFPM475 or the support flyer that came in the product box.  
Fax Send error.  
Description  
An error occurred while trying to send a fax.  
Recommended action  
Try resending the fax.  
Try faxing to another fax number.  
Check for a dial tone on the phone line by touching the Start Fax button.  
Check that the telephone cord is securely connected by unplugging and replugging the cord.  
Make sure that you are using the telephone cord that came with the product.  
Make sure that the phone is working by disconnecting the product, plugging in a telephone to the  
phone line, and making a voice call.  
Connect the product to a different phone line.  
Set the fax resolution to Standard instead of the default of Fine.  
If the error persists, contact HP. See www.hp.com/go/LJColorMFPM375 or www.hp.com/go/  
LJColorMFPM475 or the support flyer that came in the product box.  
Fax storage is full. Canceling the fax receive.  
Description  
During the fax transmission, the product ran out of memory. Only the pages that fit into memory will  
be printed.  
Recommended action  
Print all of the faxes, and then have the sender resend the fax. Have the sender divide the fax job into  
multiple jobs before resending. Cancel all fax jobs or clear the faxes from memory.  
Fax storage is full. Canceling the fax receive.  
Description  
The amount of available memory for storing faxes is insufficient to store an incoming fax.  
204  
Chapter 12 Fax  
ENWW  
Recommended action  
If you are using the Private Receive feature, print all received faxes to regain some memory.  
If you still need more memory, clear faxes from memory. Open the Service menu. In the Fax Service  
menu, select the Clear Saved Faxes option.  
Fax storage is full. Canceling the fax send.  
Description  
During the fax job, the memory filled. All pages of the fax have to be in memory for a fax job to work  
correctly. Only the pages that fit into memory were sent.  
Recommended action  
Cancel the current job. Turn the product off, and then turn it on again. Try sending the job again.  
If the error reoccurs, cancel the job and turn the product off and then on a second time. The product  
might not have enough memory for some jobs.  
No dial tone.  
Description  
The product could not detect a dial tone.  
Recommended action  
Check for a dial tone on the phone line by touching the Start Fax button.  
Unplug the telephone cord from both the product and the wall and replug the cord.  
Make sure that you are using the telephone cord that came with the product.  
Unplug the product telephone cord from the wall, plug in a telephone, and try making a voice call.  
Make sure that the phone cord from the wall telephone jack is plugged into the line  
Plug the product phone cord into a jack for another phone line.  
port.  
Check the phone line by using the Run Fax Test option from the Service menu on the control panel.  
If the error persists, contact HP. See www.hp.com/go/LJColorMFPM375 or www.hp.com/go/  
LJColorMFPM475 or the support flyer that came in the product box.  
No fax answer. Canceled send.  
Description  
Attempts to redial a fax number failed, or the Redial if No Answer option was turned off.  
Recommended action  
Call the recipient to ensure that the fax machine is on and ready.  
Solve fax problems  
ENWW  
205  
Check that you are dialing the correct fax number.  
Check that the redial option is enabled.  
Unplug the telephone cord from both the product and the wall and replug the cord.  
Unplug the product telephone cord from the wall, plug in a telephone, and try making a voice call.  
Make sure that the phone cord from the wall telephone jack is plugged into the line  
Plug the product phone cord into a jack for another phone line.  
port.  
If the error persists, contact HP. See www.hp.com/go/LJColorMFPM375 or www.hp.com/go/  
LJColorMFPM475 or the support flyer that came in the product box.  
No fax answer. Redial pending.  
Description  
The receiving fax line did not answer. The product attempts to redial after a few minutes.  
Recommended action  
Allow the product to retry sending the fax.  
Call the recipient to ensure that the fax machine is on and ready.  
Check that you are dialing the correct fax number.  
If the product continues to redial, unplug the product telephone cord from the wall, plug in a  
telephone, and try making a voice call.  
Make sure that the phone cord from the wall telephone jack is plugged into the line  
port.  
Plug the product phone cord into a jack for another phone line.  
Try a different phone cord.  
If the error persists, contact HP. See www.hp.com/go/LJColorMFPM375 or www.hp.com/go/  
LJColorMFPM475 or the support flyer that came in the product box.  
No fax detected.  
Description  
The product answered the incoming call but did not detect that a fax machine was calling.  
Recommended action  
Allow the product to retry receiving the fax.  
Try a different phone cord.  
Plug the product phone cord into a jack for another phone line.  
206  
Chapter 12 Fax  
ENWW  
If the error persists, contact HP. See www.hp.com/go/LJColorMFPM375 or www.hp.com/go/  
LJColorMFPM475 or the support flyer that came in the product box.  
Solve fax problems  
ENWW  
207  
Troubleshoot fax codes and trace reports  
View and interpret fax error codes  
Use fax error codes from the fax activity log to solve problems with the product fax features.  
Code number Description  
232  
Possible causes include the following:  
A communication failure has occurred between the two machines.  
The user at the remote machine may have pressed the Stop button.  
The power at the remote machine has been interrupted, or deliberately turned off causing the fax  
session to be interrupted.  
To solve the issue, try the following steps:  
1. Resend the fax at a different time when telephone line conditions have improved.  
2. If the error persists, and error correction is in use for the fax session, disable the Error Correction  
setting.  
282  
The product has not received any data at the start of a page during reception in error correction mode, but  
the modem has not detected a remote disconnect. The remote machine is probably transmitting sync  
frames instead of data and has either jammed or broken.  
The remote machine is probably transmitting sync frames instead of data and has either jammed or  
broken. Have the sender resend the fax after first requesting that the sender verify that the sending  
machine is working correctly.  
321  
There was a communication error with the receiving fax machine due to poor telephone line conditions.  
Resend the fax at a different time when telephone line conditions have improved.  
208  
Chapter 12 Fax  
ENWW  
 
Code number Description  
344-348  
Possible causes include the following:  
The remote machine has failed to respond to a fax command from the local machine due to the  
connection being interrupted.  
The user at the remote machine may have pressed the Stop button.  
In rare instances, incompatibility between the two machines can cause the remote machine to simply  
terminate the call.  
To solve the issue, try the following steps:  
1. Resend the fax at a different time when telephone line conditions have improved.  
2. If the error persists, and error correction is in use for the fax session, disable the Error Correction  
setting.  
381  
Possible causes include the following:  
The remote machine has failed to respond to a fax command from the local machine due to the  
connection being interrupted.  
The user at the remote machine may have pressed the Stop button.  
To solve the issue, try the following steps:  
1. Resend the fax at a different time when telephone line conditions have improved.  
2. If the error persists, and error correction is in use for the fax session, disable the Error Correction  
setting.  
Fax trace report  
A fax T.30 trace report has information that can help resolve fax transmission problems. If you call HP  
for help in resolving these problems, print a T.30 trace report before you call.  
1.  
From the Home screen, touch the Setup  
button.  
2. Touch the Service menu.  
3. Touch the Fax Service menu.  
4. Touch the Print T.30 Trace button, and then touch the Now button.  
NOTE: This procedure prints a report for the last fax job, successful or not. To generate a report for  
each unsuccessful fax job, select the If Error setting. To generate a report for each fax job, select the  
At End of Call setting.  
Fax logs and reports  
Use the following instructions to print fax logs and reports:  
Solve fax problems  
ENWW  
209  
 
Print all fax reports  
Use this procedure to print all of the following reports at one time:  
Last Call Report  
Fax Activity Log  
Phone Book Report  
Junk Fax List  
Billing Report (when Billing Codes are turned on)  
Configuration Report  
Usage Page  
1. From the Home screen, touch the Fax button.  
2. Touch the Fax Menu button.  
3. Touch the Fax Reports button.  
4. Touch the Print All Fax Reports button.  
Print individual fax reports  
1. From the Home screen, touch the Fax button.  
2. Touch the Fax Menu button.  
3. Touch the Fax Reports button.  
4. Touch the name of the report that you want to  
print.  
210  
Chapter 12 Fax  
ENWW  
 
Set the fax error report  
A fax error report is a brief report that indicates the product experienced a fax job error. You can set it  
to print after the following events:  
Every fax error (the factory-set default)  
Send fax error  
Receive fax error  
Never  
NOTE: With this option, you will have no indication that a fax failed to be transmitted unless  
you print a fax activity log.  
1. From the Home screen, touch the Fax button.  
2. Touch the Fax Menu button.  
3. Touch the Fax Reports button.  
4. Touch the Fax Error Report button, and then  
touch the printing option that you want to use.  
Change error correction and fax speed  
Set the fax-error-correction mode  
Usually, the product monitors the signals on the telephone line while it is sending or receiving a fax. If  
the product detects an error during the transmission and the error-correction setting is On, the  
product can request that the portion of the fax be resent. The factory-set default for error correction is  
On.  
You should turn off error correction only if you are having trouble sending or receiving a fax, and you  
are willing to accept the errors in the transmission. Turning off the setting might be useful when you  
are trying to send a fax overseas or receive one from overseas, or if you are using a satellite  
telephone connection.  
1.  
From the Home screen, touch the Setup  
button.  
2. Touch the Service menu.  
3. Touch the Fax Service menu.  
4. Touch the Error Correction button, and then touch the On button.  
Solve fax problems  
ENWW  
211  
     
Change the fax speed  
The fax-speed setting is the modem protocol that the product uses to send faxes. It is the worldwide  
standard for full-duplex modems that send and receive data across telephone lines at up to 33,600  
bits per second (bps). The factory-set default for the fax-speed setting is Fast (V.34).  
You should change the setting only if you are having trouble sending a fax to or receiving a fax from a  
particular device. Decreasing the fax speed might be useful when you are trying to send a fax  
overseas, or receive one from overseas, or if you are using a satellite telephone connection.  
1.  
From the Home screen, touch the Setup  
button.  
2. Touch the Fax Setup menu.  
3. Touch the Advanced Setup menu.  
4. Scroll to and touch the Fax Speed button, and then touch the speed setting that you want to use.  
Solve problems sending faxes  
An error message displays on the control panel  
The Communication error. message appears  
Allow the product to retry sending the fax. Re-sending temporarily reduces the fax speed.  
Unplug the product telephone cord from the wall, plug in a telephone, and try making a call. Plug  
the product phone cord into a jack for another phone line.  
If the product is connected to a digital phone line, verify that you are using the correct filter and  
settings provided by the digital service provider.  
Try a different phone cord.  
212  
Chapter 12 Fax  
ENWW  
       
From the control panel, change the Fax Speed option to the Medium (V.17) setting or Slow (V.  
29) setting.  
a.  
From the Home screen, touch the Setup  
button.  
b. Open the Fax Setup menu.  
c. Open the Advanced Setup menu.  
d. Open the Fax Speed menu.  
e. Select the correct setting.  
Turn off the Error Correction option.  
a.  
From the Home screen, touch the Setup  
button.  
b. Open the Service menu.  
c. Open the Fax Service menu.  
d. Open the Error Correction menu.  
e. Select the Off setting.  
NOTE: Turning off the Error Correction option can reduce image quality.  
If the error persists, contact HP. See www.hp.com/go/LJColorMFPM375 or www.hp.com/go/  
LJColorMFPM475 or the support flyer that came in the product box.  
No dial tone.  
Make sure that the telephone cord is plugged into the correct port on the product.  
Make sure that the telephone cord from the product is plugged directly into the wall telephone  
jack.  
Check for a dial tone on the phone line by using the Start Fax button.  
Unplug the product telephone cord from the wall, plug in a telephone, and try making a voice  
call.  
Unplug the telephone cord from both the product and the wall and replug the cord.  
Make sure that you are using the telephone cord that came with the product.  
Plug the product phone cord into a jack for another phone line.  
Check the phone line by using the Run Fax Test option from the Service menu on the control  
panel.  
a.  
From the Home screen, touch the Setup  
button.  
b. Open the Service menu.  
Solve fax problems  
ENWW  
213  
c. Open the Fax Service menu.  
d. Select the Run Fax Test item.  
The Fax is busy. message appears  
Try sending the fax again.  
Call the recipient to ensure that the fax machine is on and ready.  
Check that you are dialing the correct fax number.  
Check for a dial tone on the phone line by using the Start Fax button.  
Make sure that the phone is working by disconnecting the product, plugging in a telephone to the  
phone line, and making a voice call.  
Plug the product phone cord into a jack for another phone line, and try sending the fax again.  
Try a different phone cord.  
Send the fax at a later time.  
If the error persists, contact HP. See www.hp.com/go/LJColorMFPM375 or www.hp.com/go/  
LJColorMFPM475 or the support flyer that came in the product box.  
The No fax answer. message appears  
Try to resend the fax.  
Call the recipient to ensure that the fax machine is on and ready.  
Check that you are dialing the correct fax number.  
Unplug the product telephone cord from the wall, plug in a telephone, and try making a voice  
call.  
Plug the product phone cord into a jack for another phone line.  
Try a different phone cord.  
Make sure that the phone cord from the wall telephone jack is plugged into the line  
port.  
Check the phone line by using the Run Fax Test option from the Service menu on the control  
panel.  
a.  
From the Home screen, touch the Setup  
button.  
b. Open the Service menu.  
c. Open the Fax Service menu.  
d. Select the Run Fax Test item.  
If the error persists, contact HP. See www.hp.com/go/LJColorMFPM375 or www.hp.com/go/  
LJColorMFPM475 or the support flyer that came in the product box.  
214  
Chapter 12 Fax  
ENWW  
Document feeder paper jam  
Verify that the paper meets product size requirements. The product does not support pages  
longer than 381 mm (15 in) for faxing.  
Copy or print the original to letter, A4, or legal size paper, and then resend the fax.  
The Fax storage is full. message appears  
Turn the product off then on.  
Print stored faxes that have not been printed.  
a. Touch the Fax button, and then touch the Fax Menu button.  
b. Open the Receive Options menu.  
c. Select the Print Private Faxes item.  
d. Provide the password when the product prompts you.  
Delete stored faxes from memory.  
a.  
From the Home screen, touch the Setup  
button.  
b. Open the Service menu.  
c. Open the Fax Service menu.  
d. Select the Clear Saved Faxes item.  
Divide the large fax job into smaller sections, and then fax them individually.  
Scanner error  
Verify that the paper meets product size requirements. The product does not support pages  
longer than 381 mm (15 in) for faxing.  
Copy or print the original onto letter, A4, or legal size paper and then resend the fax.  
The control panel displays a Ready message with no attempt to send the fax  
Check the fax activity log for errors.  
a. Touch the Fax button, and then touch the Fax Menu button.  
b. Open the Fax Reports menu.  
c. Open the Fax Activity Log menu.  
d. Select the Print Log Now option.  
If a phone is connected to the product, make sure that the phone is hung up.  
Disconnect all other lines between the fax and the product.  
Connect the product directly into the wall telephone jack and resend the fax.  
Solve fax problems  
ENWW  
215  
 
The control panel displays the message "Storing page 1" and does not progress  
beyond that message  
Delete stored faxes from memory.  
a.  
From the Home screen, touch the Setup  
button.  
b. Open the Service menu.  
c. Open the Fax Service menu.  
d. Select the Clear Saved Faxes item.  
Faxes can be received, but not sent  
Send fax and nothing happens.  
1. Check for a dial tone on the phone line by using the Start Fax button.  
2. Turn the product off then on.  
3. Use the control panel or the HP Fax Setup Wizard to configure the fax time, date, and fax  
header information.  
a.  
From the Home screen, touch the Setup  
button.  
b. Open the Fax Setup menu.  
c. Open the Basic Setup menu.  
d. Open the Fax Header menu.  
e. Enter the correct settings.  
4. Verify that any extension phones on the line are hung up.  
5. If using a DSL service, make sure that the phone line connection to the product includes a high-  
pass filter.  
Unable to use fax functions from the control panel  
The product might be password protected. Use the HP Embedded Web Server, HP Toolbox  
software, or the control panel to set a password.  
If you do not know the password for the product, contact your system administrator.  
Verify with the system administrator that the fax functionality has not been disabled.  
216  
Chapter 12 Fax  
ENWW  
     
Unable to use speed dials  
Make sure that the fax number is valid.  
If an outside line requires a prefix, turn on the Dial Prefix option or include the prefix in the speed  
dial number.  
a.  
From the Home screen, touch the Setup  
button.  
b. Open the Fax Setup menu.  
c. Open the Basic Setup menu.  
d. Open the Dial Prefix menu.  
e. Select the On setting.  
Unable to use group dials  
Make sure that the fax number is valid.  
If an outside line requires a prefix, turn on the Dial Prefix option or include the prefix in the speed  
dial number.  
a.  
From the Home screen, touch the Setup  
button.  
b. Open the Fax Setup menu.  
c. Open the Basic Setup menu.  
d. Open the Dial Prefix menu.  
e. Select the On setting.  
Set up all entries in the group with speed dial entries.  
a. Open an unused speed dial entry.  
b. Enter the fax number for the speed dial.  
c. Touch the OK button to save the speed dial.  
Receive a recorded error message from the phone company when trying to send a fax  
Make sure you dial the fax number correctly, and make sure that the phone service is not  
blocked. For example, some phone services might prevent long distance calling.  
If an outside line requires a prefix, turn on the Dial Prefix option or include the prefix in the speed  
dial number.  
a.  
From the Home screen, touch the Setup  
button.  
b. Open the Fax Setup menu.  
c. Open the Basic Setup menu.  
Solve fax problems  
ENWW  
217  
     
d. Open the Dial Prefix menu.  
e. Select the On setting.  
NOTE: To send a fax without a prefix, when the Dial Prefix option is turned on, send the fax  
manually.  
Send a fax to an international number  
a. If a prefix is required, manually dial the telephone number with the prefix.  
b. Enter the country/region code before dialing the phone number.  
c. Wait for pauses as you hear the tones on the phone.  
d. Send the fax manually from the control panel.  
Unable to send a fax when a phone is connected to the product  
Make sure that the telephone is hung up.  
Make sure that the telephone is not being used for a voice call when faxing.  
Unplug the phone from the line, and then try sending the fax.  
218  
Chapter 12 Fax  
ENWW  
 
Solve problems receiving faxes  
The fax does not respond  
The fax has a dedicated phone line  
Set the Answer Mode option to the Automatic setting from the control panel.  
a.  
From the Home screen, touch the Setup  
button.  
b. Open the Fax Setup menu.  
c. Open the Basic Setup menu.  
d. Open the Answer Mode menu.  
e. Select the Automatic setting.  
An answering machine is connected to the product  
Set the Answer Mode option to the TAM setting and plug the answering machine into the  
“telephone” port.  
a.  
From the Home screen, touch the Setup  
button.  
b. Open the Fax Setup menu.  
c. Open the Basic Setup menu.  
d. Open the Answer Mode menu.  
e. Select the TAM setting.  
If the TAM setting is unavailable, set the Answer Mode option to the Automatic setting.  
Set the Rings to Answer setting to at least one ring more than the number of rings for which the  
answering machine is set.  
a.  
From the Home screen, touch the Setup  
button.  
b. Open the Fax Setup menu.  
c. Open the Basic Setup menu.  
Solve fax problems  
ENWW  
219  
     
d. Open the Rings to Answer menu.  
e. Select the correct setting.  
Plug the answering machine into the “telephone” port.  
If the product has a telephone handset connected, set the Answer Mode option to the Fax/Tel  
setting to route calls to the correct device. When detecting a voice call, the product generates a  
ring tone that alerts you to pick up the telephone handset.  
a.  
From the Home screen, touch the Setup  
button.  
b. Open the Fax Setup menu.  
c. Open the Basic Setup menu.  
d. Open the Answer Mode menu.  
e. Select the Fax/Tel setting.  
A telephone handset is connected to the product  
Set the Answer Mode option to the Automatic setting.  
1.  
From the Home screen, touch the Setup  
button.  
2. Open the Fax Setup menu.  
3. Open the Basic Setup menu.  
4. Open the Answer Mode menu.  
5. Select the Automatic setting.  
The Answer Mode setting is set to the Manual setting  
Touch the Start Fax button on the control panel.  
Voice mail is available on the fax line  
Add a distinctive ring service to your telephone line and change the Distinctive Ring setting on  
the product to match the ring pattern supplied by the telephone company. Contact your  
telephone company for information.  
a. Verify that the answer mode is set to the Automatic setting.  
b.  
From the Home screen, touch the Setup  
button.  
c. Open the Fax Setup menu.  
d. Open the Basic Setup menu.  
220  
Chapter 12 Fax  
ENWW  
e. Open the Distinctive Ring menu.  
f. Select the correct setting.  
Buy a dedicated line for faxing.  
Set the Answer Mode option to the Manual setting.  
a.  
From the Home screen, touch the Setup  
button.  
b. Open the Fax Setup menu.  
c. Open the Basic Setup menu.  
d. Open the Answer Mode menu.  
e. Select the Manual setting.  
NOTE: You must be present to receive faxes.  
The product is connected to a DSL phone service  
Check the installation and features. A DSL modem requires a high-pass filter on the phone line  
connection to the product. Contact your DSL service provider for a filter or buy a filter.  
Verify that the filter is plugged in.  
Replace the existing filter to make sure that it is not defective.  
The product uses a fax over IP or VoIP phone service  
Set the Fax Speed option to the Slow (V.29) or Medium (V.17) setting, or disable the Fast (V.34)  
setting.  
a.  
From the Home screen, touch the Setup  
button.  
b. Open the Fax Setup menu.  
c. Open the Advanced Setup menu.  
d. Open the Fax Speed menu.  
e. Select the correct setting.  
Contact your service provider to make sure that fax is supported and for a recommended fax  
speed settings. Some companies might require an adapter.  
Solve fax problems  
ENWW  
221  
An error message displays on the control panel  
The No fax detected. message appears  
NOTE: This error does not always refer to a missed fax. If a voice call is made to a fax number by  
mistake and the caller hangs up, the No fax detected. message appears on the control panel.  
Ask the sender to resend the fax.  
Make sure that the telephone cord from the product is plugged into the wall telephone jack.  
Try a different phone cord.  
Plug the product phone cord into a jack for another phone line.  
Make sure the telephone line and phone wall jack are active by plugging in a telephone and  
checking for a dial tone.  
Make sure that the telephone cord is plugged into the “line” port on the product.  
Check the phone line by running a fax test from the control panel.  
If the error persists, contact HP. See www.hp.com/go/LJColorMFPM375 or www.hp.com/go/  
LJColorMFPM475 or the support flyer that came in the product box.  
The Communication error. message appears  
Ask the sender to send the fax again or send at a later time when line conditions have improved.  
Unplug the product telephone cord from the wall, plug in a telephone, and try making a call. Plug  
the product phone cord into a jack for another phone line.  
Try a different phone cord.  
Set the Fax Speed option to the Slow (V.29) or Medium (V.17) setting, or disable the Fast (V.34)  
setting.  
a.  
From the Home screen, touch the Setup  
button.  
b. Open the Fax Setup menu.  
c. Open the Advanced Setup menu.  
d. Open the Fax Speed menu.  
e. Select the correct setting.  
Turn off the Error Correction feature to prevent automatic error correction.  
NOTE: Turning off the Error Correction feature can reduce image quality.  
a.  
From the Home screen, touch the Setup  
button.  
b. Open the Service menu.  
c. Open the Fax Service menu.  
222  
Chapter 12 Fax  
ENWW  
 
d. Open the Error Correction menu.  
e. Select the Off setting.  
Print the Fax Activity Log report from the control panel to determine if the error occurs with a  
specific fax number.  
a. Touch the Fax button, and then touch the Fax Menu button.  
b. Open the Fax Reports menu.  
c. Open the Fax Activity Log menu.  
d. Select the Print Log Now option.  
If the error persists, contact HP. See www.hp.com/go/LJColorMFPM375 or www.hp.com/go/  
LJColorMFPM475 or the support flyer that came in the product box.  
The Fax storage is full. message appears  
Turn the product off then on.  
Print all of the faxes, and then have the sender resend the fax.  
Ask the sender to divide a large fax job into smaller sections, and then fax them individually.  
Make sure that the resolution of the sending fax machine is not set to the Photo setting or the  
Superfine setting.  
a.  
From the Home screen, touch the Setup  
button.  
b. Open the Fax Setup menu.  
c. Open the Advanced Setup menu.  
d. Open the Fax Resolution menu.  
e. Select the correct setting.  
Cancel all fax jobs or clear the faxes from memory.  
The Fax is busy. message appears  
The product cannot receive a fax while attempting to send one. Cancel the fax send and try  
sending at a later time.  
Allow the product to try sending the fax again.  
Solve fax problems  
ENWW  
223  
A fax is received but does not print  
The Private Receive feature is on  
When the Private Receive feature is activated, received faxes are stored in memory. A password  
is required to print the stored faxes.  
Enter the password to print the fax. If you do not know the password, contact the product  
administrator.  
NOTE: Memory errors might occur if the faxes are not printed. The product will not answer if the  
memory is full.  
Sender receives a busy signal  
A handset is connected to the product  
Make sure the phone is hung up.  
Change the Answer Mode option to match the product setup.  
a.  
From the Home screen, touch the Setup  
button.  
b. Open the Fax Setup menu.  
c. Open the Basic Setup menu.  
d. Open the Answer Mode menu.  
e. Select the setting that matches the product setup.  
Set the Answer Mode option to the Fax/Tel setting to automatically receive faxes. The Fax/  
Tel setting automatically detects whether the incoming transmission is a fax or a voice call  
and routes the call to the appropriate device.  
A phone line splitter is being used  
If you are using a phone line splitter, remove the splitter and set up the phone as a downstream  
phone.  
Make sure the phone is hung up.  
Make sure the phone is not being used for a voice call when faxing.  
No dial tone  
If using a phone line splitter, remove the phone line splitter and set up the phone as a  
downstream phone.  
Cannot send or receive a fax on a PBX line  
If you are using a PBX phone line, contact your PBX administrator to configure an analog fax  
line for your product.  
224  
Chapter 12 Fax  
ENWW  
       
Solve general fax problems  
Faxes are sending slowly  
The product is experiencing poor phone line quality.  
Retry sending the fax when the line conditions have improved.  
Check with the phone service provider that the line supports fax.  
Turn off the Error Correction setting.  
a.  
Open the Setup  
menu.  
b. Open the Service menu.  
c. Open the Fax Service menu.  
d. Open the Error Correction menu.  
e. Select the Off setting.  
NOTE: This can reduce image quality.  
Use white paper for the original. Do not use colors such as gray, yellow, or pink.  
Increase the Fax Speed setting.  
a.  
Open the Setup  
menu.  
b. Open the Fax Setup menu.  
c. Open the Advanced Setup menu.  
d. Open the Fax Speed menu.  
e. Select the correct setting.  
Divide large fax jobs into smaller sections, and then fax them individually.  
Change the fax settings on the control panel to a lower resolution.  
a.  
Open the Setup  
menu.  
b. Open the Fax Setup menu.  
c. Open the Advanced Setup menu.  
d. Open the Fax Resolution menu.  
e. Select the correct setting.  
Solve fax problems  
ENWW  
225  
     
Fax quality is poor  
Fax is blurry or light.  
Increase fax resolution when sending faxes. Resolution does not affect received faxes.  
a.  
Open the Setup  
menu.  
b. Open the Fax Setup menu.  
c. Open the Advanced Setup menu.  
d. Open the Fax Resolution menu.  
e. Select the correct setting.  
NOTE: Increasing resolution slows transmission speed.  
Turn on the Error Correction setting from the control panel.  
a.  
Open the Setup  
menu.  
b. Open the Service menu.  
c. Open the Fax Service menu.  
d. Open the Error Correction menu.  
e. Select the On setting.  
Check the print cartridges and replace if necessary.  
Ask the sender to darken the contrast setting on the sending fax machine, and then resend the  
fax.  
Fax cuts off or prints on two pages  
Set the Default Paper Size setting. Faxes print on a single size of paper based on the Default  
Paper Size settings.  
a.  
Open the Setup  
menu.  
b. Open the System Setup menu.  
c. Open the Paper Setup menu.  
226  
Chapter 12 Fax  
ENWW  
   
d. Open the Default Paper Size menu.  
e. Select the correct setting.  
Set the paper type and size for the tray used for faxes.  
Turn on the Fit to Page setting to print longer length faxes on letter or A4 size paper.  
a.  
Open the Setup  
menu.  
b. Open the Fax Setup menu.  
c. Open the Advanced Setup menu.  
d. Open the Fit to Page menu.  
e. Select the On setting.  
NOTE: If the Fit to Page setting is off and the Default Paper Size setting is set to letter, a legal size  
original prints on two pages.  
Regulatory information and warranties  
For regulatory and warranty information, see Additional statements for telecom (fax) products  
Regulatory information and warranties  
ENWW  
227  
 
228  
Chapter 12 Fax  
ENWW  
Print information pages  
Information pages reside within the product memory. These pages help diagnose and solve problems  
with the product.  
NOTE: If the product language was not correctly set during installation, you can set the language  
manually so the information pages print in one of the supported languages. Change the language by  
using the System Setup menu on the control panel or the HP Embedded Web Server.  
1.  
From the Home screen, touch the Setup  
button.  
2. Touch the Reports button.  
3. Touch the name of the report that you want to print.  
Menu Item  
Description  
Demo Page  
Prints a page that demonstrates print quality  
Menu Structure  
Prints a control-panel menu layout map.  
Configuration Report  
Supplies Status  
Prints a list of the product settings  
Prints the print-cartridge status. Includes the following information:  
Estimated percentage of cartridge life remaining  
Approximate pages remaining  
Part numbers for HP print cartridges  
Number of pages printed  
Information about ordering new HP print cartridges and recycling used HP print cartridges  
Network Summary  
Displays status for:  
Network hardware configuration  
Enabled features  
TCP/IP and SNMP information  
Network statistics  
Wireless network configuration (wireless models only)  
Usage Page  
Displays the number of pages printed, faxed, copied, and scanned by the product  
Prints a list of all installed PCL 5 fonts  
PCL Font List  
PS Font List  
Prints a list of all installed PS fonts  
PCL6 Font List  
Color Usage Log  
Service Page  
Prints a list of all installed PCL 6 fonts  
Prints information about the color supply usage  
Prints the service page  
230  
Chapter 13 Manage and maintain  
ENWW  
                     
Menu Item  
Description  
Diagnostics Page  
Print Quality Page  
Prints diagnostic information about calibration and color quality  
Prints a page that helps solve problems with print quality  
Print information pages  
ENWW  
231  
   
Use the HP Embedded Web Server  
This product is equipped with an embedded Web server (EWS), which provides access to information  
about product and network activities. A Web server provides an environment in which web programs  
may run, much in the same way that an operating system, such as Windows, provides an  
environment for programs to run on a computer. The output from these programs can then be  
displayed by a Web browser, such as Microsoft Internet Explorer, Safari, or Netscape Navigator.  
An “embedded” Web server resides on a hardware device (such as an HP LaserJet product) or in  
firmware, rather than as software that is loaded on a network server.  
The advantage of an EWS is that it provides an interface to the product that anyone with a network-  
connected product and computer can use. There is no special software to install or configure, but you  
must have a supported Web browser on the computer. To gain access to the EWS, type the IP  
address for the product in the address line of the browser. To find the IP address, print a configuration  
page.  
NOTE: For Macintosh operating systems, you can use the EWS over a USB connection after  
installing the Macintosh software included with the product.  
Open the HP Embedded Web Server  
To open the HP Embedded Web Server, type the IP address or host name of the product in the  
address field of a supported Web browser. To find the IP address or host name, print a configuration  
page.  
You can also open the HP Embedded Web Server from the printer driver. Open the Services tab and  
click the supplies icon.  
NOTE: If an error occurs while opening the HP Embedded Web Server, confirm that the proxy  
settings are correct for your network.  
TIP: After you open the URL, bookmark it so that you can return to it quickly in the future.  
HP Embedded Web Server features  
The EWS allows you to view product and network status and manage printing functions from a  
computer. With the EWS, you can complete the following tasks:  
View product status information  
Enable HP Web Services, including HP ePrint.  
Determine the remaining life on all supplies and order new ones  
View and change part of the product configuration  
View and print some internal pages  
Select the language in which to display the EWS pages and control panel messages  
232  
Chapter 13 Manage and maintain  
ENWW  
       
View and change network configuration  
Set, change, or clear the product security password.  
NOTE: Changing network settings in the EWS might disable some of product software or features.  
Use HP Web Jetadmin software  
HP Web Jetadmin is an award-winning, industry-leading tool for efficiently managing a wide variety of  
networked HP devices, including printers, multifunction products, and digital senders. This single  
solution allows you to remotely install, monitor, maintain, troubleshoot, and secure your printing and  
imaging environment — ultimately increasing business productivity by helping you save time, control  
costs, and protect your investment.  
HP Web Jetadmin updates are periodically made available to provide support for specific product  
features. Visit www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin and click the Self Help and Documentation link to learn  
more about updates.  
Product security features  
The product includes a password feature that restricts access to setup features while allowing basic  
functions to continue. The password can be set from the EWS or the control panel.  
Private receive can be used to store faxes on the product until you are at the product to print them.  
Assign a system password  
Assign a password for the product so that unauthorized users cannot change the product settings.  
1. Open the HP Embedded Web Server by entering the product IP address into the address line of  
a Web browser.  
2. Click the Settings tab.  
3. On the left side of the window, click the Security menu.  
4. In the Device Security Settings area, click the Configure . . . button.  
5. In the Device Password area, type the password in the New Password box, and type it again  
in the Verify password box.  
6. Click the Apply button. Make note of the password and store it in a safe place.  
Use HP Web Jetadmin software  
ENWW  
233  
         
Economy settings  
Print with EconoMode  
EconoMode uses less toner, which might extend the life of the print cartridge.  
HP does not recommend the full-time use of EconoMode. If EconoMode is used full-time, the toner  
supply might outlast the mechanical parts in the print cartridge. If print quality begins to degrade and  
is no longer acceptable, consider replacing the print cartridge.  
1. On the File menu in the software program, click Print.  
2. Select the product, and then click the Properties or Preferences button.  
3. Click the Paper/Quality tab.  
4. Click the EconoMode check box.  
Powersave modes  
The product includes features that can help reduce energy consumption  
The sleep mode feature reduces power consumption when the product has been inactive for an  
extended period. You can set the length of time before the product enters sleep mode.  
NOTE: This mode does not affect product warm-up time.  
The Auto Power Down feature turns the product off after a certain length of time. You can adjust this  
time setting.  
Set sleep delay  
1.  
2. Open the following menus:  
From the Home screen, touch the Setup  
button.  
System Setup  
Energy Settings  
Sleep Delay  
3. Select the time for the sleep delay.  
NOTE: The default value is 15 minutes.  
234  
Chapter 13 Manage and maintain  
ENWW  
           
Set the Auto Power Down delay  
1.  
2. Open the following menus:  
From the Home screen, touch the Setup  
button.  
System Setup  
Energy Settings  
Auto Power Down  
Power Down Delay  
3. Select the time for the power-down delay.  
NOTE: The default value is 30 minutes.  
4. The product automatically wakes from the auto power-down mode when it receives jobs or when  
you press a button on the control panel. You can change which events cause the product to  
wake. Open the following menus:  
System Setup  
Energy Settings  
Auto Power Down  
Wake Events  
To turn off a wake event, select the event and then select the No option.  
Archive print  
Archive print produces output that is less susceptible to toner smearing and dusting. Use archive print  
to create documents that you want to preserve or archive.  
1.  
2. Touch the Service menu.  
3. Touch the Archive Print button, and then touch the On button.  
From the Home screen, touch the Setup  
button.  
Economy settings  
ENWW  
235  
 
Install memory DIMMs  
This product comes with 192-megabyte (MB) random-access memory installed. You can install an  
additional 256-megabyte of memory for the product by adding a dual inline memory module (DIMM).  
You can also install a font DIMM to allow the product to print characters (for example, Chinese  
language or the Cyrillic alphabet characters).  
CAUTION: Static electricity can damage electronic parts. When handling electronic parts, either  
wear an antistatic wrist strap, or frequently touch the surface of the antistatic package and then touch  
bare metal on the product.  
Install memory DIMMs  
1. Turn the product off, and then disconnect all power and interface cables.  
2. On the right side of the product, open the DIMM access door.  
3. Remove the DIMM access door.  
236  
Chapter 13 Manage and maintain  
ENWW  
     
4. To replace a DIMM that is currently installed, spread the latches apart on each side of the DIMM  
slot, lift the DIMM up at an angle, and pull it out.  
CAUTION: Static electricity can damage electronic parts. When handling electronic parts,  
either wear an antistatic wrist strap, or frequently touch the surface of the antistatic package and  
then touch bare metal on the product.  
5. Remove the new DIMM from the antistatic package, and then locate the alignment notch on the  
bottom edge of the DIMM.  
6. Holding the DIMM by the edges, align the notch on the DIMM with the bar in the DIMM slot at an  
angle.  
Install memory DIMMs  
ENWW  
237  
7. Push down on the DIMM until both latches engage the DIMM. When the installation is correct,  
the metal contacts are not visible.  
NOTE: If you have difficulty inserting the DIMM, make sure that the notch on the bottom of the  
DIMM is aligned with the bar in the slot. If the DIMM still does not go in, make sure that you are  
using the correct DIMM type.  
8. Reinsert the DIMM access door.  
9. Close the DIMM access door.  
10. Reconnect the power cable and USB or network cable, and then turn on the product.  
238  
Chapter 13 Manage and maintain  
ENWW  
Enable memory  
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003,  
1. Click Start.  
Windows Server 2008, and Windows  
Vista  
2. Click Settings.  
3. Click Printers and Faxes (using the default Start menu view) or click  
Printers (using the Classic Start menu view).  
4. Right-click the product driver icon, and then select Properties.  
5. Click the Device Settings tab.  
6. Expand the area for Installable Options.  
7. Next to Automatic Configuration, select Update Now.  
8. Click OK.  
NOTE: If the memory is not updated correctly after using the Update Now  
option, you can manually select the total amount of memory installed in the  
product in the Installable Options area.  
The Update Now option overwrites any existing product configuration settings.  
1. Click Start.  
Windows 7  
2. Click Devices and Printers.  
3. Right-click the product driver icon, and then select Printer properties.  
4. Click the Device Settings tab.  
5. Expand the area for Installable Options.  
6. Next to Automatic Configuration, select Update Now.  
7. Click OK.  
NOTE: If the memory is not updated correctly after using the Update Now  
option, you can manually select the total amount of memory installed in the  
product in the Installable Options area.  
The Update Now option overwrites any existing product configuration settings.  
Mac OS X 10.5 and 10.6  
1.  
From the Apple menu , click the System Preferences menu and then click  
the Print & Fax icon.  
2. Select the product in the left side of the window.  
3. Click the Options & Supplies button.  
4. Click the Driver tab.  
5. Configure the installed options.  
Install memory DIMMs  
ENWW  
239  
 
Check DIMM installation  
After installing the DIMM, make sure that the installation was successful.  
1. Turn the product on. Check that the Ready light is illuminated after the product has gone through  
the startup sequence. If an error message appears, a DIMM might have been incorrectly  
installed.  
2. Print a configuration page.  
3. Check the memory section on the configuration page and compare it to the configuration page  
that was printed before the memory installation. If the amount of memory has not increased, the  
DIMM might not be installed correctly, or the DIMM might be defective. Repeat the installation  
procedure. If necessary, install a different DIMM.  
NOTE: If you installed a product language (personality), check the "Installed Personalities and  
Options" section on the configuration page. This area should list the new product language.  
Memory allocation  
Utilities or jobs that you download to the product sometimes include resources (for example, fonts,  
macros, or patterns). Resources that are internally marked as permanent remain in the product  
memory until you turn the product off.  
Use the following guidelines if you use the page description language (PDL) ability to mark resources  
as permanent. For technical details, see an appropriate PDL reference for PCL or PS.  
Mark resources as permanent only when it is absolutely necessary that they remain in memory  
while the product is turned on.  
Send permanent resources to the product only at the beginning of a print job and not while the  
product is printing.  
NOTE: Overusing permanent resources or downloading them while the product is printing might  
affect product performance or the ability to print complex pages.  
240  
Chapter 13 Manage and maintain  
ENWW  
       
Clean the product  
Clean the paper path  
During the printing process, paper, toner, and dust particles can accumulate inside the product. Over  
time, this buildup can cause print-quality problems such as toner specks or smearing. This product  
has a cleaning mode that can correct and prevent these types of problems.  
Clean the paper path from the product control panel  
1.  
From the Home screen, touch the Setup  
button.  
2. Touch the Service menu.  
3. Touch the Cleaning Page button.  
4. Load plain letter or A4 paper when you are prompted.  
5. Touch the OK button to begin the cleaning process.  
A page feeds through the product slowly. Discard the page when the process is completed.  
NOTE: For models that do not have an automatic duplexer, the product prints the first side and  
then prompts you to remove the page from the output bin and reload it in Tray 1, keeping the  
same orientation.  
Clean the scanner glass strip and platen  
Over time, specks of debris might collect on the scanner glass and white plastic backing, which can  
affect performance. Use the following procedure to clean the scanner glass and white plastic backing.  
1. Use the power switch to turn off the product, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical  
socket.  
2. Open the scanner lid.  
Clean the product  
ENWW  
241  
         
3. Clean the scanner glass and the white plastic backing with a soft cloth or sponge that has been  
moistened with nonabrasive glass cleaner.  
CAUTION: Do not use abrasives, acetone, benzene, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, or carbon  
tetrachloride on any part of the product; these can damage the product. Do not place liquids  
directly on the glass or platen. They might seep and damage the product.  
4. Dry the glass and white plastic backing with a chamois or a cellulose sponge to prevent spotting.  
5. Plug in the product, and then use the power switch to turn on the product.  
Clean the document feeder pickup rollers and separation pad  
If the product document feeder experiences paper-handling problems, such as jams or multiple-page  
feeds, clean the document feeder rollers and separation pad.  
1. Open the document feeder cover.  
242  
Chapter 13 Manage and maintain  
ENWW  
 
2. Use a moist, lint-free cloth to wipe both pickup rollers and the separation pad to remove dirt.  
3. Close the document feeder cover.  
Clean the touch screen  
Clean the touch screen whenever it is necessary to remove fingerprints or dust. Wipe the touch  
screen gently with a clean, water-dampened, lint-free cloth.  
CAUTION: Use water only. Solvents or cleaners can damage the touch screen. Do not pour or  
spray water directly onto the touch screen.  
Clean the product  
ENWW  
243  
   
Product updates  
Software and firmware updates and installation instructions for this product are available at  
click the operating system, and then select the download for the product.  
244  
Chapter 13 Manage and maintain  
ENWW  
 
Self help  
In addition to the information in this guide, other sources are available that provide helpful  
information.  
HP Help and Learn Center  
The HP Help and Learn Center and other documentation are on the CD that came  
with the product or in the HP Program folder on your computer. The HP Help and  
Learn Center is a product help tool that provides easy access to product  
information, HP product Web support, troubleshooting, and regulatory and safety  
information.  
Quick Reference Topics  
Quick Reference Guide  
Control panel help  
Several Quick Reference Topics for this product are available at this Web site:  
You can print these topics and keep them near the product. They are a handy  
reference for procedures that you perform frequently.  
This guide contains procedures for the most commonly used product functions.  
The guide is available from this Web site: www.hp.com/go/LJColorMFPM375 or  
You can print this guide and keep it near the product.  
The control panel has built-in help that guides you through several tasks, such as  
replacing print cartridges and clearing jams.  
246  
Chapter 14 Solve problems  
ENWW  
 
Problem-solving checklist  
Follow these steps when trying to solve a problem with the product.  
Step 1: Check that the product power is on  
1. Make sure the product is plugged in and turned on.  
2. Make sure the power cable is connected to the product and the outlet.  
3. Check the power source by connecting the power cable to a different outlet.  
4. If the product motors do not rotate, make sure the print cartridges are installed and that the  
doors are all closed. The control panel displays messages to indicate these problems.  
5. If the document feeder motor does not rotate, open the document feeder cover and remove any  
packing material or shipping tape.  
6. If the scanner bulb does not light during copying, scanning, or faxing, contact HP support.  
Step 2: Check the control panel for error messages  
The control panel should indicate ready status. If an error message appears, resolve the error.  
Step 3: Test print functionality  
1.  
From the control panel Home screen, touch the Setup  
button.  
2. Open the Reports menu, and select the Configuration Report item to print the report.  
3. If the report does not print, make sure paper is loaded in the tray, and check the control panel to  
see if paper is jammed inside the product.  
NOTE: Make sure the paper in the tray meets specifications for this product.  
Problem-solving checklist  
ENWW  
247  
         
Step 4: Test copy functionality  
1. Place the configuration page into the document feeder and make a copy. If paper does not feed  
smoothly through the document feeder, you might need to clean the document feeder rollers and  
separation pad. Make sure the paper meets specifications for this product.  
2. Place the configuration page onto the scanner glass and make a copy.  
3. If the print quality on the copied pages is not acceptable, clean the scanner glass and the small  
glass strip.  
Step 5: Test the fax sending functionality  
1.  
From the control panel Home screen, touch the Setup  
button.  
2. Open the Service menu, and then open the Fax Service menu. Touch the Run Fax Test button  
to test the fax functionality.  
3. Touch the Fax button on the product control panel, and then touch the Start Fax button.  
Step 6: Test the fax receiving functionality  
1.  
From the control panel Home screen, touch the Setup  
button.  
2. Open the Service menu, and then open the Fax Service menu. Touch the Run Fax Test button  
to test the fax functionality.  
3. Use another fax machine to send a fax to the product.  
4. If the product does not receive the fax, make sure that you do not have too many telephone  
devices connected to the product, and that all telephone devices are connected in the correct  
order.  
5. Review and reset the product fax settings.  
6. Turn off the Private Receive feature.  
Step 7: Try sending a print job from a computer  
1. Use a word-processing program to send a print job to the product.  
2. If the job does not print, make sure you selected the correct printer driver.  
3. Uninstall and then reinstall the product software.  
Step 8: Test the walk-up USB printing functionality  
1. Load a .PDF document or .JPEG photo onto a USB flash drive, and insert it in the slot on the  
front of the product.  
2. The USB Flash Drive menu opens. Try printing the document or photo.  
3. If no documents are listed, try a different type of USB flash drive.  
248  
Chapter 14 Solve problems  
ENWW  
         
Factors that affect product performance  
Several factors affect the time it takes to print a job:  
The software program that you are using and its settings  
The use of special paper (such as transparencies, heavy paper, and custom-size paper)  
Product processing and download time  
The complexity and size of graphics  
The speed of the computer you are using  
The USB or network connection  
Whether the product is printing in color or in monochrome  
The type of USB flash drive, if you are using one  
Restore the factory-set defaults  
CAUTION: Restoring the factory-set defaults returns all of the product and network settings to the  
factory defaults, and it also clears the fax header name, phone number, and any stored faxes in the  
product memory. This procedure also clears the fax phone book, and deletes any pages that are  
stored in the memory. The procedure then automatically restarts the product.  
1.  
On the product control panel, touch the Setup  
button.  
2. Scroll to and touch the Service menu.  
3. Scroll to and touch the Restore Defaults button, and then touch the OK button.  
The product automatically restarts.  
Restore the factory-set defaults  
ENWW  
249  
     
Paper feeds incorrectly or becomes jammed  
The product does not pick up paper  
If the product does not pick up paper from the tray, try these solutions.  
1. Open the product and remove any jammed sheets of paper.  
2. Load the tray with the correct size of paper for your job.  
3. Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper. Align the  
guides with the paper-size markings in the bottom of the tray.  
4. Check the product control panel to see if the product is waiting for you to acknowledge a prompt  
to feed the paper manually. Load paper, and continue.  
The product picks up multiple sheets of paper  
If the product picks up multiple sheets of paper from the tray, try these solutions.  
1. Remove the stack of paper from the tray and flex it, rotate it 180 degrees, and flip it over. Do not  
fan the paper. Return the stack of paper to the tray.  
2. Use only paper that meets HP specifications for this product.  
3. Use paper that is not wrinkled, folded, or damaged. If necessary, use paper from a different  
package.  
4. Make sure the tray is not overfilled. If it is, remove the entire stack of paper from the tray,  
straighten the stack, and then return some of the paper to the tray.  
5. Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper. Align the  
guides with the paper-size markings in the bottom of the tray.  
Prevent paper jams  
To reduce the number of paper jams, try these solutions.  
1. Use only paper that meets HP specifications for this product.  
2. Use paper that is not wrinkled, folded, or damaged. If necessary, use paper from a different  
package.  
3. Use paper that has not previously been printed or copied on.  
4. Make sure the tray is not overfilled. If it is, remove the entire stack of paper from the tray,  
straighten the stack, and then return some of the paper to the tray.  
250  
Chapter 14 Solve problems  
ENWW  
             
5. Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper. Adjust the  
guides so they are touching the paper stack without bending it.  
6. Make sure that the tray is fully inserted in the product.  
7. If you are printing on heavy, embossed, or perforated paper, use the manual feed feature and  
feed sheets one at a time.  
Paper feeds incorrectly or becomes jammed  
ENWW  
251  
Clear jams  
Jam locations  
Jams can occur in these locations:  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Document feeder  
Rear door  
Output bin  
Tray 1  
Tray 2  
Tray 2 jam-access area  
Loose toner might remain in the product after a jam. This problem typically resolves itself after a few  
sheets have been printed.  
252  
Chapter 14 Solve problems  
ENWW  
     
Clear jams from the document feeder  
1. Turn the product off.  
2. Open the document feeder cover.  
3. Lift the document feeder roller assembly, and  
gently pull the jammed paper out.  
Clear jams  
ENWW  
253  
   
4. Close the document feeder roller assembly.  
5. Close the document feeder cover.  
6. Open the scanner lid. If paper is jammed  
behind the white plastic backing, gently pull it  
out.  
254  
Chapter 14 Solve problems  
ENWW  
Clear jams in Tray 1  
1. Pull the jammed sheet from Tray 1.  
NOTE: If the sheet tears, make sure that all  
of the fragments are removed before you  
resume printing.  
2. Pull out Tray 2 and place it on a flat surface.  
3. Lower the jam-access tray.  
Clear jams  
ENWW  
255  
   
4. Remove the jammed sheet by pulling it  
straight out.  
5. Push the jam-access tray up to close it, and  
then replace Tray 2.  
NOTE: To close the tray, push in the middle  
or with even pressure on both sides. Avoid  
pushing on one side only.  
256  
Chapter 14 Solve problems  
ENWW  
Clear jams in Tray 2  
1. Open Tray 2.  
2. Remove the jammed sheet by pulling it  
straight out.  
3. Close Tray 2.  
NOTE: To close the tray, push in the middle  
or with even pressure on both sides. Avoid  
pushing on one side only.  
Clear jams  
ENWW  
257  
   
Clear jams in the fuser area  
1. Open the rear door.  
CAUTION: The fuser, located in the back of  
the product, is hot. Wait for the fuser to cool  
before continuing.  
2. If necessary, push the guide (callout 1) and  
remove any visible paper (callout 2) from the  
bottom of the delivery area.  
NOTE: If the sheet tears, make sure that all  
fragments are removed before you resume  
printing. Do not use sharp objects to remove  
fragments.  
3. Close the rear door.  
258  
Chapter 14 Solve problems  
ENWW  
   
Clear jams in the output bin  
1. Look for jammed paper in the output bin area.  
2. Remove any visible media.  
NOTE: If the sheet tears, make sure that all  
fragments are removed before resuming  
printing.  
3. Open and then close the rear door to clear  
the message.  
Clear jams  
ENWW  
259  
   
Clear jams in the duplexer (duplexing models only)  
1. Open the rear door.  
CAUTION: The fuser, located in the back of  
the product, is hot. Wait for the fuser to cool  
before continuing.  
2. If necessary, pull the guide (callout 1) and  
remove any visible paper (callout 2) from the  
bottom of the delivery area.  
3. If necessary, remove any visible paper from  
bottom side of the duplexing unit.  
260  
Chapter 14 Solve problems  
ENWW  
 
4. If you can not see any jammed paper, lift the  
duplexing unit using the tab on the side of the  
duplexing unit.  
5. If you can see the trailing edge of the paper,  
remove the paper from the product.  
6. If you can see the leading edge of the paper,  
remove it from the product.  
7. Close the rear door.  
Clear jams  
ENWW  
261  
Improve print quality  
You can prevent most print-quality problems by following these guidelines.  
Use the correct paper type setting in the printer driver  
Check the paper type setting if you are having any of the following problems:  
Toner is smearing on the printed pages.  
Repeated marks occur on the printed pages.  
Printed pages are curled.  
Toner flakes off the printed pages.  
Printed pages have small unprinted areas.  
Change the paper type setting for Windows  
1. On the File menu in the software program, click Print.  
2. Select the product, and then click the Properties or Preferences button.  
3. Click the Paper/Quality tab.  
4. From the Paper type drop-down list, click the More... option.  
5. Expand the list of Type is: options.  
6. Expand each category of paper types until you find the paper type that you are using.  
7. Select the option for the type of paper you are using, and click the OK button.  
Change the paper type setting for Mac  
1. On the File menu in the software program, click the Print option.  
2. In the Copies & Pages menu, click the Page Setup button.  
262  
Chapter 14 Solve problems  
ENWW  
       
3. Select a size from the Paper Size drop-down list, and then click the OK button.  
4. Open the Finishing menu.  
5. Select a type from the Media-type drop-down list.  
6. Click the Print button.  
Adjust color settings in the printer driver  
Change the color theme for a print job  
1. On the File menu in the software program, click Print.  
2. Click Properties or Preferences.  
3. Click the Color tab.  
4. Select a color theme from the Color Themes drop-down list.  
Default (sRGB): This theme sets the product to print RGB data in raw device mode. When  
using this theme, manage color in the software program or in the operating system for  
correct rendering.  
Vivid: The product increases the color saturation in the midtones. Use this theme when  
printing business graphics.  
Photo: The product interprets RGB color as if it were printed as a photograph using a  
digital mini lab. The product renders deeper, more saturated colors differently than with the  
Default (sRBG) theme. Use this theme when printing photos.  
Photo (Adobe RGB 1998): Use this theme with printing digital photos that use the  
AdobeRGB color space rather than sRGB. Turn off color management in the software  
program when using this theme.  
None  
Improve print quality  
ENWW  
263  
   
Change the color options  
Change the color options settings for the current print job from the color tab of the printer driver.  
1. On the File menu in the software program, click Print.  
2. Click Properties or Preferences.  
3. Click the Color tab.  
4. Click the Automatic or Manual setting.  
Automatic setting: Select this setting for most color print jobs  
Manual setting: Select this setting to adjust the color settings independent from other  
settings.  
NOTE: Changing color settings manually can impact output. HP recommends that only  
color graphics experts change these settings.  
5. Click the Print in Grayscale option to print a color document in black and white. Use this option  
to print color documents for photocopying or faxing.  
6. Click the OK button.  
264  
Chapter 14 Solve problems  
ENWW  
Use paper that meets HP specifications  
Use different paper if you are having any of the following problems:  
The printing is too light or seems faded in areas.  
Specks of toner are on the printed pages.  
Toner is smearing on the printed pages.  
Printed characters seem misformed.  
Printed pages are curled.  
Always use a paper type and weight that this product supports. In addition, follow these guidelines  
when selecting paper:  
Use paper that is of good quality and free of cuts, nicks, tears, spots, loose particles, dust,  
wrinkles, voids, staples, and curled or bent edges.  
Use paper that has not been previously printed on.  
Use paper that is designed for use in laser printers. Do not use paper that is designed only for  
use in Inkjet printers.  
Use paper that is not too rough. Using smoother paper generally results in better print quality.  
Print a cleaning page  
Print a cleaning page to remove dust and excess toner from the paper path if you are having any of  
the following problems:  
Specks of toner are on the printed pages.  
Toner is smearing on the printed pages.  
Repeated marks occur on the printed pages.  
Use the following procedure to print a cleaning page.  
1.  
From the Home screen, touch the Setup  
button.  
2. Touch the Service menu.  
3. Touch the Cleaning Page button.  
4. Load plain letter or A4 paper when you are prompted.  
5. Touch the OK button to begin the cleaning process.  
A page feeds through the product slowly. Discard the page when the process is completed.  
NOTE: For models that do not have an automatic duplexer, the product prints the first side and  
then prompts you to remove the page from the output bin and reload it in Tray 1, keeping the  
same orientation.  
Improve print quality  
ENWW  
265  
       
Calibrate the product to align the colors  
If the printed output has colored shadows, blurry graphics, or areas that have poor color, you might  
need to calibrate the product to align the colors. Print the Diagnostics Page from the Reports menu  
on the control panel to check the color alignment. If the blocks of color on that page are not aligned  
with each other, you need to calibrate the product.  
1. On the product control panel, open the System Setup menu.  
2. Open the Print Quality menu, and select the Color Calibration item.  
3. Select the Calibrate Now option.  
Check the print cartridges  
Check each print cartridge, and replace it if necessary, if you are having any of the following  
problems:  
The printing is too light or seems faded in areas.  
Printed pages have small unprinted areas.  
Printed pages have streaks or bands.  
NOTE: If you are using a draft print setting, the printing might appear light.  
If you determine that you need to replace a print cartridge, print the Supplies Status Page to find the  
part number for the correct genuine HP print cartridge.  
Type of print cartridge  
Steps to resolve the problem  
Refilled or remanufactured print  
cartridge  
Hewlett Packard Company cannot recommend the use of non-HP supplies, either  
new or remanufactured. Because they are not HP products, HP cannot influence  
their design or control their quality. If you are using a refilled or remanufactured  
print cartridge and are not satisfied with the print quality, replace the cartridge with  
a genuine HP cartridge.  
Genuine HP print cartridge  
1. The product control panel or the Supplies Status page indicates Very Low  
status when the cartridge has reached the end of its estimated life. Replace  
the print cartridge if print quality is no longer acceptable.  
2. Print a Print Quality Page from the Reports menu. If streaks or marks are in  
one color on the page, you might have a defect in that color cartridge. See  
the instructions in this document for interpreting the page. Replace the print  
cartridge if necessary.  
3. Visually inspect the print cartridge for damage. See the instructions that  
follow. Replace the print cartridge if necessary.  
4. If printed pages have marks that repeat several times at the same distance  
apart, print a cleaning page. If this does not solve the problem, use the  
repetitive defects ruler in this document to identify the cause of the problem.  
266  
Chapter 14 Solve problems  
ENWW  
     
Print the Supplies Status page  
The Supplies Status page indicates the estimated life remaining in print cartridges. It also lists the  
part number for the correct genuine HP print cartridge for your product so you can order a  
replacement print cartridge, as well as other useful information.  
1. At the control panel, press the OK button to open the menus.  
2. Open the following menus:  
Reports  
Supplies Status  
Improve print quality  
ENWW  
267  
 
Interpret the Print Quality Page  
1. On the product control panel, open the Reports menu.  
2. Select the Print Quality Page item to print it.  
This page contains five bands of color, which are divided into four groups as indicated in the following  
illustration. By examining each group, you can isolate the problem to a particular print cartridge.  
Section  
Print-cartridge  
Yellow  
1
2
3
4
Cyan  
Black  
Magenta  
If dots or streaks appear in only one of the groups, replace the print cartridge that correlates with  
that group.  
If dots appear in more than one group, print a cleaning page. If this does not solve the problem,  
determine if the dots are always the same color; for example, if magenta dots appear in all five  
color bands. If the dots are all the same color, replace that print cartridge.  
If streaks appear in multiple color bands, contact HP. A component other than the print cartridge  
is probably causing the problem.  
Inspect the print cartridge for damage  
1. Remove the print cartridge from the product, and verify that the sealing tape has been removed.  
2. Check the memory chip for damage.  
268  
Chapter 14 Solve problems  
ENWW  
   
3. Examine the surface of the green imaging drum on the bottom of the print cartridge.  
CAUTION: Do not touch the green roller (imaging drum) on the bottom of the cartridge.  
Fingerprints on the imaging drum can cause print-quality problems.  
4. If you see any scratches, fingerprints, or other damage on the imaging drum, replace the print  
cartridge.  
5. If the imaging drum does not appear to be damaged, rock the print cartridge gently several times  
and reinstall it. Print a few pages to see if the problem has resolved.  
Repeating defects  
If defects repeat at any of the following intervals on the page, a print cartridge might be damaged.  
22 mm  
27 mm  
28 mm  
75 mm  
Use the printer driver that best meets your printing needs  
You might need to use a different printer driver if the printed page has unexpected lines in graphics,  
missing text, missing graphics, incorrect formatting, or substituted fonts.  
Improve print quality  
ENWW  
269  
       
HP PCL 6 driver  
Provided as the default driver. This driver is automatically installed unless  
you select a different one.  
Recommended for all Windows environments  
Provides the overall best speed, print quality, and product-feature support for  
most users  
Developed to align with the Windows Graphic Device Interface (GDI) for the  
best speed in Windows environments  
Might not be fully compatible with third-party and custom software programs  
that are based on PCL 5  
Recommended for printing with Adobe® software programs or with other  
highly graphics-intensive software programs  
HP UPD PS driver  
HP UPD PCL 5  
Provides support for printing from postscript emulation needs, or for  
postscript flash font support  
Recommended for general office printing in Windows environments  
Compatible with previous PCL versions and older HP LaserJet products  
The best choice for printing from third-party or custom software programs  
The best choice when operating with mixed environments, which require the  
product to be set to PCL 5 (UNIX, Linux, mainframe)  
Designed for use in corporate Windows environments to provide a single  
driver for use with multiple printer models  
Preferred when printing to multiple printer models from a mobile Windows  
computer  
HP UPD PCL 6  
Recommended for printing in all Windows environments  
Provides the overall best speed, print quality, and printer feature support for  
most users  
Developed to align with Windows Graphic Device Interface (GDI) for best  
speed in Windows environments  
May not be fully compatible with third-party and custom solutions based on  
PCL5  
Download additional printer drivers from this Web site: www.hp.com/go/LJColorMFPM375_software  
270  
Chapter 14 Solve problems  
ENWW  
Improve print quality for copies  
If you encounter print quality problems in copied documents, review the solutions for printed  
documents listed previously in this document. However, some print-quality problems occur only in  
copied documents.  
If streaks appear on copies made by using the document feeder, clean the small glass strip on  
the left side of the scanner assembly.  
If dots or other defects appear on copies made by using the scanner glass, clean the scanner  
glass and the white plastic backing.  
1. Use the power switch to turn off the product, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical  
socket.  
2. Open the scanner lid.  
3. Clean the scanner glass and the white plastic backing with a soft cloth or sponge that has been  
moistened with nonabrasive glass cleaner.  
CAUTION: Do not use abrasives, acetone, benzene, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, or carbon  
tetrachloride on any part of the product; these can damage the product. Do not place liquids  
directly on the glass or platen. They might seep and damage the product.  
4. Dry the glass and white plastic backing with a chamois or a cellulose sponge to prevent spotting.  
5. Plug in the product, and then use the power switch to turn on the product.  
Improve print quality  
ENWW  
271  
   
The product does not print or it prints slowly  
The product does not print  
If the product does not print at all, try the following solutions.  
1. Make sure the product is turned on and that the control panel indicates it is ready.  
If the control panel does not indicate the product is ready, turn the product off and then on  
again.  
If the control panel indicates the product is ready, try sending the job again.  
2. If the control panel indicates the product has an error, resolve the error and then try sending the  
job again.  
3. Make sure the cables are all connected correctly. If the product is connected to a network, check  
the following items:  
Check the light next to the network connection on the product. If the network is active, the  
light is green.  
Make sure that you are using a network cable and not a phone cord to connect to the  
network.  
Make sure the network router, hub, or switch is turned on and that it is working correctly.  
4. Install the HP software from the CD that came with the product. Using generic printer drivers can  
cause delays clearing jobs from the print queue.  
5. From the list of printers on your computer, right-click the name of this product, click Properties,  
and open the Ports tab.  
If you are using a network cable to connect to the network, make sure the printer name  
listed on the Ports tab matches the product name on the product configuration page.  
If you are using a USB cable and are connecting to a wireless network, make sure the box  
is checked next to Virtual printer port for USB.  
6. If you are using a personal firewall system on the computer, it might be blocking communication  
with the product. Try temporarily disabling the firewall to see if it is the source of the problem.  
7. If your computer or the product is connected to a wireless network, low signal quality or  
interference might be delaying print jobs.  
272  
Chapter 14 Solve problems  
ENWW  
     
The product prints slowly  
If the product prints, but it seems slow, try the following solutions.  
1. Make sure the computer meets the minimum specifications for this product. For a list of  
specifications, go to this Web site: www.hp.com/go/LJColorMFPM375 or www.hp.com/go/  
2. When you configure the product to print on some paper types, such as heavy paper, the product  
prints more slowly so it can correctly fuse the toner to the paper. If the paper type setting is not  
correct for the type of paper you are using, change the setting to the correct paper type.  
3. If your computer or the product is connected to a wireless network, low signal quality or  
interference might be delaying print jobs.  
The product does not print or it prints slowly  
ENWW  
273  
   
Solve walk-up USB printing problems  
The USB Flash Drive menu does not open when you insert the USB  
accessory  
1. You might be using a USB storage accessory or a file system that this product does not support.  
Save the files on a standard USB storage accessory that uses File Allocation Table (FAT) file  
systems. The product supports FAT12, FAT16, and FAT32 USB storage accessories.  
2. If another menu is already open, close that menu and then reinsert the USB storage accessory.  
3. The USB storage accessory might have multiple partitions. (Some USB storage accessory  
manufacturers install software on the accessory that creates partitions, similar to a CD.)  
Reformat the USB storage accessory to remove the partitions, or use a different USB storage  
accessory.  
4. The USB storage accessory might require more power than the product can provide.  
a. Remove the USB storage accessory.  
b. Turn the product off and then on.  
c. Use a USB storage accessory that has its own power supply or that requires less power.  
5. The USB storage accessory might not be functioning correctly.  
a. Remove the USB storage accessory.  
b. Turn the product off and then on.  
c. Try printing from another USB storage accessory.  
The file does not print from the USB storage accessory  
1. Make sure paper is in the tray.  
2. Check the control panel for messages. If paper is jammed in the product, clear the jam.  
274  
Chapter 14 Solve problems  
ENWW  
       
The file that you want to print is not listed in the USB Flash Drive menu  
1. You might be trying to print a file type that the USB printing feature does not support. The  
product supports .PDF and .JPEG file types.  
2. You might have too many files in a single folder on the USB storage accessory. Reduce the  
number of files in the folder by moving them to subfolders.  
3. You might be using a character set for the file name that the product does not support. In this  
case, the product replaces the file names with characters from a different character set. Rename  
the files using ASCII characters.  
Solve product connectivity problems  
Solve direct-connect problems  
If you have connected the product directly to a computer, check the cable.  
Verify that the cable is connected to the computer and to the product.  
Verify that the cable is not longer than 5 m (16.4 ft). Try using a shorter cable.  
Verify that the cable is working correctly by connecting it to another product. Replace the cable if  
necessary.  
Solve network problems  
Check the following items to verify that the product is communicating with the network. Before  
beginning, print a configuration page from the product control panel and locate the product IP  
address that is listed on this page.  
Poor physical connection  
1. Verify that the product is attached to the correct network port using a cable of the correct length.  
2. Verify that cable connections are secure.  
Solve product connectivity problems  
ENWW  
275  
               
3. Look at the network port connection on the back of the product, and verify that the amber activity  
light and the green link-status light are lit.  
4. If the problem continues, try a different cable or port on the hub.  
The computer is using the incorrect IP address for the product  
1. Open the printer properties and click the Ports tab. Verify that the current IP address for the  
product is selected. The product IP address is listed on the product configuration page.  
2. If you installed the product using the HP standard TCP/IP port, select the box labeled Always  
print to this printer, even if its IP address changes.  
3. If you installed the product using a Microsoft standard TCP/IP port, use the hostname instead of  
the IP address.  
4. If the IP address is correct, delete the product and then add it again.  
The computer is unable to communicate with the product  
1. Test network communication by pinging the network.  
a. Open a command-line prompt on your computer. For Windows, click Start, click Run, and  
then type cmd.  
b. Type ping followed by the IP address for your product.  
c. If the window displays round-trip times, the network is working.  
2. If the ping command failed, verify that the network hubs are on, and then verify that the network  
settings, the product, and the computer are all configured for the same network.  
The product is using incorrect link and duplex settings for the network  
Hewlett-Packard recommends leaving this setting in automatic mode (the default setting). If you  
change these settings, you must also change them for your network.  
New software programs might be causing compatibility problems  
Verify that any new software programs are correctly installed and that they use the correct printer  
driver.  
The computer or workstation might be set up incorrectly  
1. Check the network drivers, printer drivers, and the network redirection.  
2. Verify that the operating system is configured correctly.  
276  
Chapter 14 Solve problems  
ENWW  
         
The product is disabled, or other network settings are incorrect  
1. Review the configuration page to check the status of the network protocol. Enable it if  
necessary.  
2. Reconfigure the network settings if necessary.  
Solve product connectivity problems  
ENWW  
277  
 
Solve wireless network problems  
Wireless connectivity checklist  
The product and the wireless router are turned on and have power. Also make sure the wireless  
radio in the product is turned on.  
The service set identifier (SSID) is correct. Print a configuration page to determine the SSID. If  
you are not sure the SSID is correct, run the wireless setup again.  
With secured networks, make sure the security information is correct. If the security information  
is incorrect, run the wireless setup again.  
If the wireless network is working correctly, try accessing other computers on the wireless  
network. If the network has Internet access, try connecting to the Internet over a wireless  
connection.  
The encryption method (AES or TKIP) is the same for the product as it is for the wireless access  
point (on networks using WPA security).  
The product is within the range of the wireless network. For most networks, the product must be  
within 30 m (100 ft) of the wireless access point (wireless router).  
Obstacles do not block the wireless signal. Remove any large metal objects between the access  
point and the product. Make sure poles, walls, or support columns containing metal or concrete  
do not separate the product and wireless access point.  
The product is located away from electronic devices that might interfere with the wireless signal.  
Many devices can interfere with the wireless signal including motors, cordless phones, security  
system cameras, other wireless networks, and some Bluetooth devices.  
The printer driver is installed on the computer.  
You have selected the correct printer port.  
The computer and product connect to the same wireless network.  
278  
Chapter 14 Solve problems  
ENWW  
   
The control panel displays the message: The wireless feature on this  
product has been turned off  
1. Touch the Wireless Menu button.  
2. Touch the Turn Wireless On/Off button, and then touch the On button.  
The product does not print after the wireless configuration completes  
1. Make sure the product is turned on and in the ready state.  
2. Make sure you are connecting to the correct wireless network.  
3. Make sure that the wireless network is working correctly.  
a. Open the Network Setup menu, and then open the Wireless Menu item.  
b. Select the Run Network Test item to test the wireless network. The product prints a report  
with the results.  
4. Make sure that the correct port or product is selected.  
a. From the list of printers on your computer, right-click the name of this product, click  
Properties, and then open the Ports tab.  
b. Make sure the box is checked next to Virtual printer port for USB.  
5. Make sure that your computer is working correctly. If necessary, restart your computer.  
The product does not print, and the computer has a third-party firewall  
installed  
1. Update the firewall with the most recent update available from the manufacturer.  
2. If programs request firewall access when you install the product or try to print, make sure you  
allow the programs to run.  
3. Temporarily turn off the firewall, and then install the wireless product on the computer. Enable  
the firewall when you have completed the wireless installation.  
The wireless connection does not work after moving the wireless router or  
product  
Make sure that the router or product connects to the same network that your computer connects to.  
1. Open the Reports menu, and select the Configuration Report item to print the report.  
2. Compare the service set identifier (SSID) on the configuration report to the SSID in the printer  
configuration for your computer.  
3. If the SSIDs are not the same, the devices are not connecting to the same network. Reconfigure  
the wireless setup for your product.  
Solve wireless network problems  
ENWW  
279  
       
Cannot connect more computers to the wireless product  
1. Make sure that the other computers are within the wireless range and that no obstacles block  
the signal. For most networks, the wireless range is within 30 m (100 ft) of the wireless access  
point.  
2. Make sure the product is turned on and in the ready state.  
3. Turn off any third-party firewalls on your computer.  
4. Make sure that the wireless network is working correctly.  
a. On the product control panel, open the Network Setup menu, and then open the Wireless  
Menu item.  
b. Select the Run Network Test item to test the wireless network. The product prints a report  
with the results.  
5. Make sure that the correct port or product is selected.  
a. From the list of printers on your computer, right-click the name of this product, click  
Properties, and then open the Ports tab.  
b. Click the Configure Port button to verify that the IP address matches the IP address listed  
on the Run Network Test report.  
6. Make sure that your computer is working correctly. If necessary, restart your computer.  
The wireless product loses communication when connected to a VPN  
Typically, you cannot connect to a VPN and other networks at the same time.  
The network does not appear in the wireless networks list  
Make sure the wireless router is turned on and has power.  
The network might be hidden. However, you can still connect to a hidden network.  
280  
Chapter 14 Solve problems  
ENWW  
     
The wireless network is not functioning  
1. To verify if the network has lost communication, try connecting other devices to the network.  
2. Test network communication by pinging the network.  
a. Open a command-line prompt on your computer. For Windows, click Start, click Run, and  
then type cmd.  
b. Type ping followed by the service set identifier (SSID) for your network.  
c. If the window displays round-trip times, the network is working.  
3. Make sure that the router or product connects to the same network that your computer connects  
to.  
a. Open the Reports menu, and select the Configuration Report item to print the report.  
b. Compare the service set identifier (SSID) on the configuration report to the SSID in the  
printer configuration for your computer.  
c. If the SSIDs are not the same, the devices are not connecting to the same network.  
Reconfigure the wireless setup for your product.  
Solve wireless network problems  
ENWW  
281  
 
Solve product software problems with Windows  
Problem  
Solution  
A printer driver for the product is Reinstall the product software.  
not visible in the Printer folder  
NOTE: Close any applications that are running. To close an application that has an icon in the  
system tray, right-click the icon, and select Close or Disable.  
Try plugging the USB cable into a different USB port on the computer.  
Reinstall the product software.  
An error message was  
displayed during the software  
installation  
NOTE: Close any applications that are running. To close an application that has an icon in the task  
bar, right-click the icon, and select Close or Disable.  
Check the amount of free space on the drive where you are installing the product software. If  
necessary, free up as much space as you can, and reinstall the product software.  
If necessary, run the Disk Defragmenter, and reinstall the product software.  
Print a Configuration page, and verify the product functionality.  
The product is in Ready mode,  
but nothing prints  
Verify that all of the cables are correctly seated and within specifications. This includes the USB and  
power cables. Try a new cable.  
Verify the IP Address on the Configuration Page matches the IP address for the software port. Use  
one of the following procedures:  
Windows XP, Windows Server  
2003, Windows Server 2008,  
and Windows Vista  
1. Click Start.  
2. Click Settings.  
3. Click Printers and Faxes (using the default Start menu view)  
or click Printers (using the Classic Start menu view).  
4. Right-click the product driver icon, and then select Properties.  
5. Click the Ports tab, and then click Configure Port.  
6. Verify the IP address, and then click OK or Cancel.  
7. If the IP Addresses are not the same, delete the driver, and  
reinstall the driver using the correct IP address.  
Windows 7  
1. Click Start.  
2. Click Devices and Printers.  
3. Right-click the product driver icon, and then select Printer  
properties.  
4. Click the Ports tab, and then click Configure Port.  
5. Verify the IP address, and then click OK or Cancel.  
6. If the IP Addresses are not the same, delete the driver, and  
reinstall the driver using the correct IP address.  
282  
Chapter 14 Solve problems  
ENWW  
   
Solve product software problems with Mac  
The printer driver is not listed in the Print & Fax list  
1. Make sure that the product .GZ file is in the following hard-drive folder: Library/Printers/  
PPDs/Contents/Resources. If necessary, reinstall the software.  
2. If the GZ file is in the folder, the PPD file might be corrupt. Delete the file and then reinstall the  
software.  
The product name does not appear in the product list in the Print & Fax  
list  
1. Make sure that the cables are connected correctly and the product is on.  
2. Print a configuration page to check the product name. Verify that the name on the configuration  
page matches the product name in the Print & Fax list.  
3. Replace the USB or network cable with a high-quality cable.  
The printer driver does not automatically set up the selected product in  
the Print & Fax list  
1. Make sure that the cables are connected correctly and the product is on.  
2. Make sure that the product .GZ file is in the following hard-drive folder: Library/Printers/  
PPDs/Contents/Resources. If necessary, reinstall the software.  
3. If the GZ file is in the folder, the PPD file might be corrupt. Delete the file and then reinstall the  
software.  
4. Replace the USB or network cable with a high-quality cable.  
Solve product software problems with Mac  
ENWW  
283  
         
A print job was not sent to the product that you wanted  
1. Open the print queue and restart the print job.  
2. Another product with the same or similar name might have received your print job. Print a  
configuration page to check the product name. Verify that the name on the configuration page  
matches the product name in the Print & Fax list.  
When connected with a USB cable, the product does not appear in the  
Print & Fax list after the driver is selected.  
Software troubleshooting  
Make sure that your Mac operating system is Mac OS X 10.5 or later.  
Hardware troubleshooting  
1. Make sure that the product is turned on.  
2. Make sure that the USB cable is connected correctly.  
3. Make sure that you are using the appropriate high-speed USB cable.  
4. Make sure that you do not have too many USB devices drawing power from the chain.  
Disconnect all of the devices from the chain, and connect the cable directly to the USB port on  
the computer  
5. Check to see if more than two non-powered USB hubs are connected in a row on the chain.  
Disconnect all of the devices from the chain, and then connect the cable directly to the USB port  
on the computer.  
NOTE: The iMac keyboard is a non-powered USB hub.  
You are using a generic printer driver when using a USB connection  
If you connected the USB cable before you installed the software, you might be using a generic  
printer driver instead of the driver for this product.  
1. Delete the generic printer driver.  
2. Reinstall the software from the product CD. Do not connect the USB cable until the software  
installation program prompts you.  
3. If multiple printers are installed, make sure that you have selected the correct printer in the  
Format For drop-down menu in the Print dialog box.  
284  
Chapter 14 Solve problems  
ENWW  
     
A Supplies and accessories  
ENWW  
285  
   
Order parts, accessories, and supplies  
Order supplies and paper  
Order genuine HP parts or accessories  
Order through service or support providers  
Contact an HP-authorized service or support provider.  
Part numbers  
Item  
Part number  
Cartridge number  
Description  
Print  
CE410A  
CE410X  
305A  
Standard-capacity black print cartridge with HP  
ColorSphere toner  
cartridges  
305X  
High-capacity black print cartridge with HP ColorSphere  
toner  
CE411A  
CE412A  
CE413A  
CB423A  
CF106A  
305A  
305A  
305A  
Cyan print cartridge with HP ColorSphere toner  
Yellow print cartridge with HP ColorSphere toner  
Magenta print cartridge with HP ColorSphere toner  
256 MB memory DIMM  
Memory  
Paper-  
250-sheet paper feeder (optional Tray 3)  
handling  
accessories  
USB cable  
8121-0868  
2-meter A-to-B cable  
NOTE: For information about the yield for the cartridges, see www.hp.com/go/pageyield. Actual  
yield depends on specific use.  
286  
Appendix A Supplies and accessories  
ENWW  
             
Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement  
HP PRODUCT  
DURATION OF LIMITED WARRANTY  
One year from date of purchase  
HP LaserJet Pro 300 color MFP M375nw and HP LaserJet  
Pro 400 color MFP M475dn, and M475dw  
HP warrants to you, the end-user customer, that HP hardware and accessories will be free from  
defects in materials and workmanship after the date of purchase, for the period specified above. If HP  
receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will, at its option, either repair or  
replace products which prove to be defective. Replacement products may be either new or equivalent  
in performance to new.  
HP warrants to you that HP software will not fail to execute its programming instructions after the date  
of purchase, for the period specified above, due to defects in material and workmanship when  
properly installed and used. If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will  
replace software which does not execute its programming instructions due to such defects.  
HP does not warrant that the operation of HP products will be uninterrupted or error free. If HP is  
unable, within a reasonable time, to repair or replace any product to a condition as warranted, you will  
be entitled to a refund of the purchase price upon prompt return of the product.  
HP products may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in performance or may have been  
subject to incidental use.  
Warranty does not apply to defects resulting from (a) improper or inadequate maintenance or  
calibration, (b) software, interfacing, parts or supplies not supplied by HP, (c) unauthorized  
modification or misuse, (d) operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the  
product, or (e) improper site preparation or maintenance.  
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND  
NO OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR  
IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF  
MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  
Some countries/regions, states or provinces do not allow limitations on the duration of an implied  
warranty, so the above limitation or exclusion might not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific  
legal rights and you might also have other rights that vary from country/region to country/region, state  
to state, or province to province.  
HP's limited warranty is valid in any country/region or locality where HP has a support presence for  
this product and where HP has marketed this product. The level of warranty service you receive may  
vary according to local standards. HP will not alter form, fit or function of the product to make it  
operate in a country/region for which it was never intended to function for legal or regulatory reasons.  
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE REMEDIES IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT  
ARE YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES. EXCEPT AS INDICATED ABOVE, IN NO EVENT  
WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF DATA OR FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL,  
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE,  
WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE. Some countries/regions, states or  
provinces do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the  
above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you.  
288  
Appendix B Service and support  
ENWW  
   
THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT  
LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION  
TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT  
TO YOU.  
Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement  
ENWW  
289  
HP's Premium Protection Warranty: LaserJet print  
cartridge limited warranty statement  
This HP product is warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship.  
This warranty does not apply to products that (a) have been refilled, refurbished, remanufactured or  
tampered with in any way, (b) experience problems resulting from misuse, improper storage, or  
operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the printer product or (c) exhibit  
wear from ordinary use.  
To obtain warranty service, please return the product to place of purchase (with a written description  
of the problem and print samples) or contact HP customer support. At HP's option, HP will either  
replace products that prove to be defective or refund your purchase price.  
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND NO  
OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR  
IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF  
MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE  
LIABLE FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR  
DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE.  
THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT  
LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION  
TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT  
TO YOU.  
290  
Appendix B Service and support  
ENWW  
   
Data stored on the print cartridge  
The HP print cartridges used with this product contain a memory chip that assists in the operation of  
the product.  
In addition, this memory chip collects a limited set of information about the usage of the product,  
which might include the following: the date when the print cartridge was first installed, the date when  
the print cartridge was last used, the number of pages printed using the print cartridge, the page  
coverage, the printing modes used, any printing errors that might have occurred, and the product  
model. This information helps HP design future products to meet our customers' printing needs.  
The data collected from the print cartridge memory chip does not contain information that can be  
used to identify a customer or user of the print cartridge or their product. However, a customer can  
choose not to store usage data on the memory chip through the control panel.  
HP collects a sampling of the memory chips from print cartridges returned to HP's free return and  
recycling program (HP Planet Partners: www.hp.com/recycle). The memory chips from this sampling  
are read and studied in order to improve future HP products. HP partners who assist in recycling this  
print cartridge might have access to this data, as well.  
Any third party possessing the print cartridge might have access to the anonymous information on the  
memory chip.  
Data stored on the print cartridge  
ENWW  
291  
   
End User License Agreement  
PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS SOFTWARE PRODUCT: This End-User  
License Agreement (“EULA”) is a contract between (a) you (either an individual or the entity you  
represent) and (b) Hewlett-Packard Company (“HP”) that governs your use of the software product  
(“Software”). This EULA does not apply if there is a separate license agreement between you and HP  
or its suppliers for the Software, including a license agreement in online documentation. The term  
“Software” may include (i) associated media, (ii) a user guide and other printed materials, and (iii)  
“online” or electronic documentation (collectively “User Documentation”).  
RIGHTS IN THE SOFTWARE ARE OFFERED ONLY ON THE CONDITION THAT YOU AGREE TO  
ALL TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS EULA. BY INSTALLING, COPYING, DOWNLOADING,  
OR OTHERWISE USING THE SOFTWARE, YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THIS EULA. IF YOU  
DO NOT ACCEPT THIS EULA, DO NOT INSTALL, DOWNLOAD, OR OTHERWISE USE THE  
SOFTWARE. IF YOU PURCHASED THE SOFTWARE BUT DO NOT AGREE TO THIS EULA,  
PLEASE RETURN THE SOFTWARE TO YOUR PLACE OF PURCHASE WITHIN FOURTEEN  
DAYS FOR A REFUND OF THE PURCHASE PRICE; IF THE SOFTWARE IS INSTALLED ON OR  
MADE AVAILABLE WITH ANOTHER HP PRODUCT, YOU MAY RETURN THE ENTIRE UNUSED  
PRODUCT.  
1. THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. The Software may include, in addition to HP proprietary software  
(“HP Software”), software under licenses from third parties (“Third Party Software” and “Third  
Party License”). Any Third Party Software is licensed to you subject to the terms and conditions  
of the corresponding Third Party License. Generally, the Third Party License is in a file such as  
“license.txt” or a “readme” file. You should contact HP support if you cannot find a Third Party  
License. If the Third Party Licenses include licenses that provide for the availability of source  
code (such as the GNU General Public License) and the corresponding source code is not  
included with the Software, then check the product support pages of HP's website (hp.com) to  
learn how to obtain such source code.  
2. LICENSE RIGHTS. You will have the following rights provided you comply with all terms and  
conditions of this EULA:  
a. Use. HP grants you a license to Use one copy of the HP Software. “Use” means installing,  
copying, storing, loading, executing, displaying, or otherwise using the HP Software. You  
may not modify the HP Software or disable any licensing or control feature of the  
HP Software. If this Software is provided by HP for Use with an imaging or printing product  
(for example, if the Software is a printer driver, firmware, or add-on), the HP Software may  
only be used with such product (“HP Product”). Additional restrictions on Use may appear  
in the User Documentation. You may not separate component parts of the HP Software for  
Use. You do not have the right to distribute the HP Software.  
b. Copying. Your right to copy means you may make archival or back-up copies of the  
HP Software, provided each copy contains all the original HP Software’s proprietary notices  
and is used only for back-up purposes.  
3. UPGRADES. To Use HP Software provided by HP as an upgrade, update, or supplement  
(collectively “Upgrade”), you must first be licensed for the original HP Software identified by HP  
as eligible for the Upgrade. To the extent the Upgrade supersedes the original HP Software, you  
may no longer use such HP Software. This EULA applies to each Upgrade unless HP provides  
other terms with the Upgrade. In case of a conflict between this EULA and such other terms, the  
other terms will prevail.  
292  
Appendix B Service and support  
ENWW  
   
4. TRANSFER.  
a. Third Party Transfer. The initial end user of the HP Software may make a one-time transfer  
of the HP Software to another end user. Any transfer will include all component parts,  
media, User Documentation, this EULA, and if applicable, the Certificate of Authenticity.  
The transfer may not be an indirect transfer, such as a consignment. Prior to the transfer,  
the end user receiving the transferred Software will agree to this EULA. Upon transfer of  
the HP Software, your license is automatically terminated.  
b. Restrictions. You may not rent, lease or lend the HP Software or Use the HP Software for  
commercial timesharing or bureau use. You may not sublicense, assign or otherwise  
transfer the HP Software except as expressly provided in this EULA.  
5. PROPRIETARY RIGHTS. All intellectual property rights in the Software and User  
Documentation are owned by HP or its suppliers and are protected by law, including applicable  
copyright, trade secret, patent, and trademark laws. You will not remove any product  
identification, copyright notice, or proprietary restriction from the Software.  
6. LIMITATION ON REVERSE ENGINEERING. You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or  
disassemble the HP Software, except and only to the extent that the right to do so is allowed  
under applicable law.  
7. CONSENT TO USE OF DATA. HP and its affiliates may collect and use technical information  
you provide in relation to (i) your Use of the Software or the HP Product, or (ii) the provision of  
support services related to the Software or the HP Product. All such information will be subject to  
HP’s privacy policy. HP will not use such information in a form that personally identifies you  
except to the extent necessary to enhance your Use or provide support services.  
8. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. Notwithstanding any damages that you might incur, the entire  
liability of HP and its suppliers under this EULA and your exclusive remedy under this EULA will  
be limited to the greater of the amount actually paid by you for the Product or U.S. $5.00. TO  
THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS  
SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, OR  
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOST PROFITS, LOST DATA,  
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, PERSONAL INJURY, OR LOSS OF PRIVACY) RELATED IN  
ANY WAY TO THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF HP OR ANY  
SUPPLIER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES AND EVEN IF  
THE ABOVE REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. Some states or other  
jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so  
the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you.  
9. U.S. GOVERNMENT CUSTOMERS. Software was developed entirely at private expense. All  
Software is commercial computer software within the meaning of the applicable acquisition  
regulations. Accordingly, pursuant to US FAR 48 CFR 12.212 and DFAR 48 CFR 227.7202, use,  
duplication and disclosure of the Software by or for the U.S. Government or a U.S. Government  
subcontractor is subject solely to the terms and conditions set forth in this End User License  
Agreement, except for provisions which are contrary to applicable mandatory federal laws.  
End User License Agreement  
ENWW  
293  
10. COMPLIANCE WITH EXPORT LAWS. You will comply with all laws, rules, and regulations (i)  
applicable to the export or import of the Software, or (ii) restricting the Use of the Software,  
including any restrictions on nuclear, chemical, or biological weapons proliferation.  
11. RESERVATION OF RIGHTS. HP and its suppliers reserve all rights not expressly granted to  
you in this EULA.  
© 2009 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.  
Rev. 04/09  
294  
Appendix B Service and support  
ENWW  
OpenSSL  
This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit  
(http://www.openssl.org/)  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED  
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES  
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN  
NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY  
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES  
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;  
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND  
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT  
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS  
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected]). This  
product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected]).  
OpenSSL  
ENWW  
295  
 
Customer support  
Get telephone support for your country/region  
Country/region phone numbers are on the flyer that was in  
the box with your product or at www.hp.com/support/.  
Have the product name, serial number, date of purchase,  
and problem description ready.  
Get 24-hour Internet support  
Get support for products used with a Macintosh computer  
Download software utilities, drivers, and electronic  
information  
Order additional HP service or maintenance agreements  
Register your product  
296  
Appendix B Service and support  
ENWW  
     
Physical specifications  
Table C-1 Physical specifications  
Product  
Height  
Depth  
Width  
Weight  
HP LaserJet Pro 300  
color MFP M375nw  
500 mm (19.7 inches)  
483 mm (19.0 inches)  
420 mm (16.5 inches)  
28.2 kg (62.2 lb)  
HP LaserJet Pro 400  
color MFP M475dn  
500 mm (19.7 inches)  
500 mm (19.7 inches)  
483 mm (19.0 inches)  
483 mm (19.0 inches)  
420 mm (16.5 inches)  
420 mm (16.5 inches)  
29.5 kg (65.0 lb)  
29.5 kg (65.0 lb)  
HP LaserJet Pro 400  
color MFP M475dw  
Power consumption, electrical specifications, and  
acoustic emissions  
for current information.  
CAUTION: Power requirements are based on the country/region where the product is sold. Do not  
convert operating voltages. This will damage the product and void the product warranty.  
Environmental specifications  
Table C-2 Environmental specifications1  
Recommended  
15° to 32.5° C  
(59° to 90.5° F)  
20 to 70%  
Operating  
Storage  
Temperature  
15° to 32.5° C  
(59° to 90.5° F)  
10 to 80%  
–20° to 40° C  
(–4° to 104° F)  
95% or less  
Relative humidity  
Altitude  
0 to 3048 m (0 to 10,000 ft)  
1
Values are subject to change.  
298  
Appendix C Product specifications  
ENWW  
             
FCC regulations  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,  
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection  
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can  
radiate radio frequency energy. If this equipment is not installed and used in accordance with the  
instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no  
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause  
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the  
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the  
following measures:  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase separation between equipment and receiver.  
Connect equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is located.  
Consult your dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician.  
NOTE: Any changes or modifications to the printer that are not expressly approved by HP could  
void the user’s authority to operate this equipment.  
Use of a shielded interface cable is required to comply with the Class B limits of Part 15 of FCC rules.  
Environmental product stewardship program  
Protecting the environment  
Hewlett-Packard Company is committed to providing quality products in an environmentally sound  
manner. This product has been designed with several attributes to minimize impacts on our  
environment.  
Ozone production  
This product generates no appreciable ozone gas (O3).  
Power consumption  
Power usage drops significantly while in Ready or Sleep mode, which saves natural resources and  
saves money without affecting the high performance of this product. Hewlett-Packard printing and  
imaging equipment marked with the ENERGY STAR® logo is qualified to the U.S. Environmental  
Protection Agency's ENERGY STAR specifications for imaging equipment. The following mark will  
appear on ENERGY STAR qualified imaging products:  
300  
Appendix D Regulatory information  
ENWW  
           
Additional ENERGY STAR qualified imaging product model information is listed at:  
Toner consumption  
EconoMode uses less toner, which might extend the life of the print cartridge. HP does not  
recommend the full-time use of EconoMode. If EconoMode is used full-time, the toner supply might  
outlast the mechanical parts in the print cartridge. If print quality begins to degrade and is no longer  
acceptable, consider replacing the print cartridge.  
Paper use  
This product’s manual/automatic duplex feature (two-sided printing) and N-up printing (multiple pages  
printed on one page) capability can reduce paper usage and the resulting demands on natural  
resources.  
Plastics  
Plastic parts over 25 grams are marked according to international standards that enhance the ability  
to identify plastics for recycling purposes at the end of the product’s life.  
HP LaserJet print supplies  
It’s easy to return and recycle your HP LaserJet print cartridges after use—free of charge—with  
HP Planet Partners. Multilingual program information and instructions are included in every new  
HP LaserJet print cartridge and supplies package. You help reduce the toll on the environment further  
when you return multiple cartridges together rather than separately.  
HP is committed to providing inventive, high-quality products and services that are environmentally  
sound, from product design and manufacturing to distribution, customer use and recycling. When you  
participate in the HP Planet Partners program, we ensure your HP LaserJet print cartridges are  
recycled properly, processing them to recover plastics and metals for new products and diverting  
millions of tons of waste from landfills. Since this cartridge is being recycled and used in new  
materials, it will not be returned to you. Thank you for being environmentally responsible!  
NOTE: Use the return label to return original HP LaserJet print cartridges only. Please do not use  
this label for HP inkjet cartridges, non-HP cartridges, refilled or remanufactured cartridges or warranty  
returns. For information about recycling your HP inkjet cartridges please go to http://www.hp.com/  
Environmental product stewardship program  
ENWW  
301  
         
Return and recycling instructions  
United States and Puerto Rico  
The enclosed label in the HP LaserJet toner cartridge box is for the return and recycling of one or  
more HP LaserJet print cartridges after use. Please follow the applicable instructions below.  
Multiple returns (more than one cartridge)  
1. Package each HP LaserJet print cartridge in its original box and bag.  
2. Tape the boxes together using strapping or packaging tape. The package can weigh up to 31 kg  
(70 lb).  
3. Use a single pre-paid shipping label.  
OR  
1. Use your own suitable box, or request a free bulk collection box from www.hp.com/recycle or  
1-800-340-2445 (holds up to 31 kg (70 lb) of HP LaserJet print cartridges).  
2. Use a single pre-paid shipping label.  
Single returns  
1. Package the HP LaserJet print cartridge in its original bag and box.  
2. Place the shipping label on the front of the box.  
Shipping  
For US and Puerto Rico HP LaserJet print cartridge recycling returns, use the pre-paid, pre-  
addressed shipping label contained in the box. To use the UPS label, give the package to the UPS  
driver during your next delivery or pick-up, or take it to an authorized UPS drop-off center.  
(Requested UPS Ground pickup will be charged normal pick-up rates) For the location of your local  
UPS drop-off center, call 1-800-PICKUPS or visit www.ups.com.  
If you are returning the package with the FedEx label, give the package to either the U.S. Postal  
Service carrier or FedEx driver during your next pick-up or delivery. (Requested FedEx Ground  
pickup will be charged normal pick-up rates). Or, you can drop off your packaged print cartridge(s) at  
any U.S. Post Office or any FedEx shipping center or store. For the location of your nearest U.S. Post  
Office, please call 1-800-ASK-USPS or visit www.usps.com. For the location of your nearest FedEx  
shipping center/store, please call 1-800-GOFEDEX or visit www.fedex.com.  
For more information, or to order additional labels or boxes for bulk returns, visit www.hp.com/recycle  
or call 1-800-340-2445. Information subject to change without notice.  
Residents of Alaska and Hawaii  
Do not use the UPS label. Call 1-800-340-2445 for information and instructions. The U.S. Postal  
Service provides no-cost cartridge return transportation services under an arrangement with HP for  
Alaska and Hawaii.  
302  
Appendix D Regulatory information  
ENWW  
   
Non-U.S. returns  
To participate in HP Planet Partners return and recycling program, just follow the simple directions in  
the recycling guide (found inside the packaging of your new product supply item) or visit  
www.hp.com/recycle. Select your country/region for information on how to return your HP LaserJet  
printing supplies.  
Paper  
This product is capable of using recycled papers when the paper meets the guidelines outlined in the  
HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide. This product is suitable for the use of recycled paper  
according to EN12281:2002.  
Material restrictions  
This HP product does not contain added mercury.  
This HP product contains a battery that might require special handling at end-of-life. The batteries  
contained in or supplied by Hewlett-Packard for this product include the following:  
HP LaserJet Pro 300 color MFP M375 and HP LaserJet Pro 400 color MFP M475  
Type  
Carbon monofluoride lithium  
Weight  
0.8 g  
Location  
User-removable  
On formatter board  
No  
For recycling information, you can go to www.hp.com/recycle, or contact your local authorities or the  
Electronics Industries Alliance: www.eiae.org.  
Environmental product stewardship program  
ENWW  
303  
     
Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the  
European Union  
This symbol on the product or on its packaging indicates that this product must not be disposed of  
with your other household waste. Instead, it is your responsibility to dispose of your waste equipment  
by handing it over to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic  
equipment. The separate collection and recycling of your waste equipment at the time of disposal will  
help to conserve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human  
health and the environment. For more information about where you can drop off your waste  
equipment for recycling, please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service  
or the shop where you purchased the product.  
Chemical substances  
HP is committed to providing our customers with information about the chemical substances in our  
products as needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH (Regulation EC No  
1907/2006 of the European Parliament and the Council). A chemical information report for this  
product can be found at: www.hp.com/go/reach.  
Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS)  
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for supplies containing chemical substances (for example,  
toner) can be obtained by accessing the HP Web site at www.hp.com/go/msds or www.hp.com/  
304  
Appendix D Regulatory information  
ENWW  
         
For more information  
To obtain information about these environmental topics:  
Product environmental profile sheet for this and many related HP products  
HP’s commitment to the environment  
HP’s environmental management system  
HP’s end-of-life product return and recycling program  
Material Safety Data Sheets  
Environmental product stewardship program  
ENWW  
305  
 
Declaration of conformity  
Declaration of Conformity  
according to ISO/IEC 17050-1 and EN 17050-1  
Hewlett-Packard Company DoC#: BOISB-1002-03-rel.1.0  
Manufacturer's Name:  
Manufacturer's Address:  
11311 Chinden Boulevard  
Boise, Idaho 83714-1021, USA  
declares, that the product  
Product Name:  
HP LaserJet Pro 400 color MFP M475dn  
BOISB-1002-03  
Regulatory Model Number2)  
BOISB-0903-00 – (US-Fax Module LIU)  
BOISB-0903-01 – (EURO-Fax Module LIU)  
ALL  
Product Options:  
Print Cartridges:  
CE410A, CE410X, CE411A, CE412A, CE413A  
conforms to the following Product Specifications:  
SAFETY: IEC 60950-1:2005 / EN60950-1: 2006+A11  
IEC 60825-1:2007 / EN 60825-1:2007 (Class 1 Laser/LED Product)  
IEC 62311:2007 / EN62311:2008  
GB4943-2001  
CISPR22:2005 +A1 / EN55022:2006 +A1 - Class B1)  
EN 61000-3-2:2006  
EMC:  
EN 61000-3-3:2008  
EN 55024:1998 +A1 +A2  
FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class B1) / ICES-003, Issue 4  
GB9254-2008, GB17625.1-2003  
ES 203 021; FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 683)  
Regulation (EC) No. 1275/2008  
TELECOM:  
ENERGY USE:  
ENERGY STAR® Qualified Imaging Equipment Typical Electricity Consumption (TEC) Test  
Procedure  
Supplementary Information:  
The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 2004/108/EC and the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC, the  
R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC (Annex II), the EuP Directive 2005/32/EC and carries the CE-Marking accordingly.  
306  
Appendix D Regulatory information  
ENWW  
 
This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two Conditions: (1) this device may not cause  
harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired  
operation.  
1. The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-Packard Personal Computer Systems.  
2. For regulatory purposes, this product is assigned a Regulatory model number. This number should not be confused with the product  
name or the product number(s).  
3. Telecom approvals and standards appropriate for the target countries/regions have been applied to this product, in addition to those  
listed above.  
4. This product uses an analog fax accessory module which Regulatory Model numbers are: BOISB-0903-00 (US-LIU) or  
BOISB-0903-01 (EURO LIU), as needed to meet technical regulatory requirements for the countries/regions this product will be sold.  
Boise, Idaho USA  
October 2011  
For regulatory topics only:  
European Contact:  
Your Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard GmbH, Department HQ-  
TRE / Standards Europe, Herrenberger Straße 140, D-71034, Böblingen (FAX: +49-7031-14-3143)  
USA Contact:  
Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company, PO Box 15, Mail Stop 160, Boise, Idaho  
83707-0015 (Phone: 208-396-6000)  
Declaration of conformity  
ENWW  
307  
Declaration of conformity (wireless models)  
Declaration of Conformity  
according to ISO/IEC 17050-1 and EN 17050-1  
Manufacturer's Name:  
Hewlett-Packard Company  
11311 Chinden Boulevard  
Boise, Idaho 83714-1021, USA  
DoC#: BOISB-1002-02&-04 Rel.1.0  
Manufacturer's Address:  
declares, that the product  
Product Name:  
HP LaserJet Pro 300 color MFP M375nw  
HP LaserJet Pro 400 color MFP M475dw  
BOISB-1002-02, BOISB-1002-04  
BOISB-0903-00 – (US-Fax Module LIU)  
BOISB-0903-01 – (EURO-Fax Module LIU)  
SDGOB – 0892 – (Radio Module)  
ALL  
Regulatory Model Number2)  
Product Options:  
Print Cartridges:  
CE410A, CE410X, CE411A, CE412A, CE413A  
conforms to the following Product Specifications:  
SAFETY: IEC 60950-1:2005 / EN60950-1: 2006+A11  
IEC 60825-1:2007 / EN 60825-1:2007 (Class 1 Laser/LED Product)  
IEC 62311:2007 / EN 62311:2008  
GB4943-2001  
CISPR22:2005 +A1 / EN55022:2006 +A1 - Class B1)  
EN 61000-3-2:2006  
EMC:  
EN 61000-3-3:2008  
EN 55024:1998 +A1 +A2  
FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class B1) / ICES-003, Issue 4  
GB9254-2008, GB17625.1-2003  
ES 203 021; FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 683)  
TELECOM:  
Radio5)  
EN 301 489-1:V1.8.1 (2008-04) / EN 301 489-17:V2.1.1 (2009-05)  
EN 300 328: V1.7.1 (2006-10)  
FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Subpart C (Section 15.247) / IC: RSS-210  
Regulation (EC) No. 1275/2008  
ENERGY USE:  
ENERGY STAR® Qualified Imaging Equipment Typical Electricity Consumption (TEC) Test  
Procedure  
308  
Appendix D Regulatory information  
ENWW  
 
Supplementary Information:  
The product herewith complies with the requirements of the R&TTE; Directive 1999/5/EC Annex II and Annex IV, EMC Directive  
2004/108/EC, the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC, the EuP Directive 2005/32/EC and carries the CE-Marking  
accordingly.  
This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two Conditions: (1) this device may not cause  
harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired  
operation.  
1. The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-Packard Personal Computer Systems.  
2. For regulatory purposes, this product is assigned a Regulatory model number. This number should not be confused with the product  
name or the product number(s).  
3. Telecom approvals and standards appropriate for the target countries/regions have been applied to this product, in addition to those  
listed above.  
4. This product uses an analog fax accessory module which Regulatory Model numbers are: BOISB-0903-00 (US-LIU) or  
BOISB-0903-01 (EURO LIU), as needed to meet technical regulatory requirements for the countries/regions this product will be sold.  
5. This product uses a radio module device which Regulatory Model number is SDGOB-0892 as needed to meet technical regulatory  
requirements for the countries/regions this product will be sold.  
Boise, Idaho USA  
October 2011  
For regulatory topics only:  
European Contact:  
Your Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard GmbH, Department HQ-  
TRE / Standards Europe, Herrenberger Straße 140, D-71034, Böblingen (FAX: +49-7031-14-3143)  
USA Contact:  
Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company, PO Box 15, Mail Stop 160, Boise, Idaho  
83707-0015 (Phone: 208-396-6000)  
Declaration of conformity (wireless models)  
ENWW  
309  
Safety statements  
Laser safety  
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration  
has implemented regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is  
mandatory for products marketed in the United States. The device is certified as a “Class 1” laser  
product under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance  
Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since radiation  
emitted inside the device is completely confined within protective housings and external covers, the  
laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation.  
WARNING! Using controls, making adjustments, or performing procedures other than those  
specified in this user guide may result in exposure to hazardous radiation.  
Canadian DOC regulations  
Complies with Canadian EMC Class B requirements.  
« Conforme à la classe B des normes canadiennes de compatibilité électromagnétiques. « CEM ». »  
VCCI statement (Japan)  
Power cord instructions  
Make sure your power source is adequate for the product voltage rating. The voltage rating is on the  
product label. The product uses either 100-127 Vac or 220-240 Vac and 50/60 Hz.  
Connect the power cord between the product and a grounded AC outlet.  
CAUTION: To prevent damage to the product, use only the power cord that is provided with the  
product.  
Power cord statement (Japan)  
310  
Appendix D Regulatory information  
ENWW  
                 
EMC statement (Korea)  
Laser statement for Finland  
Luokan 1 laserlaite  
Klass 1 Laser Apparat  
HP LaserJet Pro 300 color MFP M375nw, HP LaserJet Pro 400 color MFP M475dn, M475dw,  
laserkirjoitin on käyttäjän kannalta turvallinen luokan 1 laserlaite. Normaalissa käytössä kirjoittimen  
suojakotelointi estää lasersäteen pääsyn laitteen ulkopuolelle. Laitteen turvallisuusluokka on  
määritetty standardin EN 60825-1 (2007) mukaisesti.  
VAROITUS !  
Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa käyttäjän  
turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle.  
VARNING !  
Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i bruksanvisning specificerats, kan användaren utsättas för  
osynlig laserstrålning, som överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1.  
HUOLTO  
HP LaserJet Pro 300 color MFP M375nw, HP LaserJet Pro 400 color MFP M475dn, M475dw -  
kirjoittimen sisällä ei ole käyttäjän huollettavissa olevia kohteita. Laitteen saa avata ja huoltaa  
ainoastaan sen huoltamiseen koulutettu henkilö. Tällaiseksi huoltotoimenpiteeksi ei katsota  
väriainekasetin vaihtamista, paperiradan puhdistusta tai muita käyttäjän käsikirjassa lueteltuja,  
käyttäjän tehtäväksi tarkoitettuja ylläpitotoimia, jotka voidaan suorittaa ilman erikoistyökaluja.  
VARO !  
Mikäli kirjoittimen suojakotelo avataan, olet alttiina näkymättömällelasersäteilylle laitteen ollessa  
toiminnassa. Älä katso säteeseen.  
VARNING !  
Om laserprinterns skyddshölje öppnas då apparaten är i funktion, utsättas användaren för osynlig  
laserstrålning. Betrakta ej strålen.  
Tiedot laitteessa käytettävän laserdiodin säteilyominaisuuksista: Aallonpituus 775-795 nm Teho 5 m  
W Luokan 3B laser.  
Safety statements  
ENWW  
311  
       
GS statement (Germany)  
Das Gerät ist nicht für die Benutzung im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz  
vorgesehen. Um störende Reflexionen am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz zu vermeiden, darf dieses Produkt  
nicht im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld platziert warden.  
Substances Table (China)  
Restriction on Hazardous Substances statement (Turkey)  
Türkiye Cumhuriyeti: EEE Yönetmeliğine Uygundur  
Restriction on Hazardous Substances statement (Ukraine)  
Обладнання відповідає вимогам Технічного регламенту щодо обмеження використання деяких  
небезпечних речовин в електричному та електронному обладнанні, затвердженого постановою  
Кабінету Міністрів України від 3 грудня 2008 1057  
312  
Appendix D Regulatory information  
ENWW  
       
Additional statements for telecom (fax) products  
EU Statement for Telecom Operation  
This product is intended to be connected to the analog Public Switched Telecommunication Networks  
(PSTN) of European Economic Area (EEA) countries/regions.  
It meets requirements of EU R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC (Annex II) and carries appropriate CE  
conformity marking.  
For more details see Declaration of Conformity issued by the manufacturer in another section of this  
manual.  
However due to differences between individual national PSTNs the product may not guarantee  
unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN termination point. Network  
compatibility depends on the correct setting being selected by the customer in preparation of its  
connection to the PSTN. Please follow the instructions provided in the user manual.  
If you experience network compatibility issues, please contact your equipment supplier or Hewlett-  
Packard help desk in the country/region of operation.  
Connecting to a PSTN termination point may be the subject of additional requirements set out by the  
local PSTN operator.  
New Zealand Telecom Statements  
The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has  
accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no  
endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it  
provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of  
Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is  
compatible with all of Telecom’s network services.  
This equipment may not provide for the effective hand-over of a call to another device connected to  
the same line.  
This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom “111” Emergency Service.  
This product has not been tested to ensure compatibility with the FaxAbility distinctive ring service for  
New Zealand.  
Additional FCC statement for telecom products (US)  
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA.  
On the back of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in  
the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone  
company.  
The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices, which may be connected to the telephone line.  
Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an  
incoming call. In most, but not all, areas, the sum of the RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be  
Additional statements for telecom (fax) products  
ENWW  
313  
       
certain of the number of devices that may be connected to the line, as determined by the total RENs,  
contact the telephone company to determine the maximum REN for the calling area.  
This equipment uses the following USOC jacks: RJ11C.  
An FCC-compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this equipment. This equipment  
is designed to be connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using a compatible modular  
jack, which is Part 68 compliant. This equipment cannot be used on telephone company-provided  
coin service. Connection to Party Line Service is subject to state tariffs.  
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in  
advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical,  
the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your  
right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.  
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that  
could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide  
advance notice in order for you to make the necessary modifications in order to maintain  
uninterrupted service.  
If trouble is experienced with this equipment, please see the numbers in this manual for repair and  
(or) warranty information. If the trouble is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone  
company may request you remove the equipment from the network until the problem is resolved.  
The customer can do the following repairs: Replace any original equipment that came with the device.  
This includes the print cartridge, the supports for trays and bins, the power cord, and the telephone  
cord. It is recommended that the customer install an AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this  
device is connected. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and  
other electrical surges.  
Telephone Consumer Protection Act (US)  
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer  
or other electronic device, including fax machines, to send any message unless such message clearly  
contains, in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the  
transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or  
individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business,  
or other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided cannot be a 900 number or any other  
number for which charges exceed local or long distance transmission charges).  
Industry Canada CS-03 requirements  
Notice: The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification means the  
equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational, and safety  
requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirement  
document(s). The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user’s  
satisfaction. Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible for the  
equipment to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment  
must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. The customer should be aware that  
compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations.  
Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier.  
Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give  
314  
Appendix D Regulatory information  
ENWW  
   
the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment. Users  
should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility,  
telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This  
precaution can be particularly important in rural areas.  
CAUTION: Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the  
appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate. The Ringer Equivalence  
Number (REN) of this device is 0.0.  
Notice: The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device provides an  
indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The  
termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement  
that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Number of all the devices does not exceed five (5.0). The  
standard connecting arrangement code (telephone jack type) for equipment with direct connections to  
the telephone network is CA11A.  
Vietnam Telecom wired/wireless marking for ICTQC Type approved  
products  
Additional statements for telecom (fax) products  
ENWW  
315  
 
Additional statements for wireless products  
FCC compliance statement—United States  
Exposure to radio frequency radiation  
CAUTION: The radiated output power of this device is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure  
limits. Nevertheless, the device shall be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact  
during normal operation is minimized.  
In order to avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human  
proximity to the antenna shall not be less than 20 cm ( (8 in)) during normal operation.  
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including  
interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.  
CAUTION: Based on Section 15.21 of the FCC rules, changes of modifications to the operation of  
this product without the express approval by Hewlett-Packard Company may invalidate its authorized  
use.  
Australia statement  
This device incorporates a radio-transmitting (wireless) device. For protection against radio  
transmission exposure, it is recommended that this device be operated no less than 20 cm from the  
head, neck, or body.  
Brazil ANATEL statement  
Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário, isto é, não tem direito à proteção contra  
interferência prejudicial, mesmo de estações do mesmo tipo, e não pode causar interferência a  
sistemas operando em caráter primário.  
Canadian statements  
For Indoor Use. This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions  
from digital apparatus as set out in the radio interference regulations of the Canadian Department of  
Communications. The internal wireless radio complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada.  
Pour l´usage d´intérieur. Le présent appareil numérique n´émet pas de bruits radioélectriques  
dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescribes dans le  
règlement sur le brouillage radioélectrique édicté par le Ministère des Communications du Canada.  
Le composant RF interne est conforme à la norme CNR-210 d´Industrie Canada.  
European Union regulatory notice  
The telecommunications functionality of this product may be used in the following EU and EFTA  
countries/regions:  
316  
Appendix D Regulatory information  
ENWW  
           
Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany,  
Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta,  
Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden,  
Switzerland, and United Kingdom.  
Notice for use in France  
For 2.4 GHz Wireless LAN operation of this product certain restrictions apply: This equipment may be  
used indoor for the entire 2400-2483.5 MHz frequency band (channels 1-13). For outdoor use, only  
2400-2454 MHz frequency band (channels 1-9) may be used. For the latest requirements, see  
L'utilisation de cet equipement (2.4 GHz Wireless LAN) est soumise à certaines restrictions : Cet  
équipement peut être utilisé à l'intérieur d'un bâtiment en utilisant toutes les fréquences de  
2400-2483.5 MHz (Chaine 1-13). Pour une utilisation en environnement extérieur, vous devez utiliser  
les fréquences comprises entre 2400-2454 MHz (Chaine 1-9). Pour les dernières restrictions, voir,  
Notice for use in Russia  
Существуют определенные ограничения по использованию беспроводных сетей (стандарта  
802.11 b/g) с рабочей частотой 2,4 ГГц: Данное оборудование может использоваться внутри  
помещений с использованием диапазона частот 2400-2483,5 МГц (каналы 1-13). При  
использовании внутри помещений максимальная эффективная изотропноизлучаемая  
мощность (ЭИИМ) должна составлять не более 100мВт.  
Korean statement  
Additional statements for wireless products  
ENWW  
317  
     
Taiwan statement  
Vietnam Telecom wired/wireless marking for ICTQC Type approved  
products  
318  
Appendix D Regulatory information  
ENWW  
   
Index  
A
replacing 92  
storage 91  
configuring  
IP address 47  
accessories  
ordering 285, 286  
acoustic specifications 298  
advanced setup  
fax 19  
AirPrint 52, 57  
answer mode, setting 184  
answering machines, connecting  
fax settings 185  
anticounterfeit supplies 91  
autoreduction settings, fax 187  
supplies status page 16  
warranty 290  
connecting to a wireless network  
connectivity  
solving problems 275  
USB 64  
contrast settings  
copy 154  
cautions iii  
change  
print cartridge 92  
checklist  
fax troubleshooting 200  
checklists, printing 17  
clean  
touch screen 243  
cleaning  
paper path 241, 265  
collating copies 150  
color  
fax 182  
control panel  
buttons and lights 10  
clean touch screen 243  
cleaning page, printing 241  
help 12  
Home screen 11  
HP Web Services menu 15  
menu map, printing 16  
menus 14  
B
batteries included 303  
billing codes, fax  
using 183  
adjusting 140  
bin, output  
Edge Control 142  
halftone options 142  
manage 139  
jams, clearing 259  
Reports menu 16  
settings 41, 49  
conventions, document iii  
copies  
changing number of  
(Windows) 111  
copy menu 30  
locating  
black and white scanning 165  
blocking faxes 185  
booklets  
creating (Windows) 133  
busy signals, redialing options  
matching 144  
Neutral Grays 142  
printed vs. monitor 144  
printing in grayscale  
(Windows) 124  
using 139  
copying  
color alignment, calibrating 266  
color options  
canceling 149  
collation 150  
C
caller-ID boxes, connecting 172  
Canadian DOC regulations 310  
canceling  
copy jobs 149  
faxes 190  
print job 53, 108  
scan jobs 163  
cartridges  
HP EasyColor (Windows) 143  
setting (Windows) 122  
color settings  
contrast, adjusting 154  
double-sided 158, 159  
edge-to-edge 154  
enlarging 149  
light/dark settings 154  
multiple copies 146  
one-touch 146  
adjusting 263  
Color tab settings 56  
color usage log 16  
color, scanning settings 164, 165  
comparison, product models  
configuration page 16  
paper settings 155  
photos 156  
non-HP 91  
recycling 91, 301  
quality, adjusting 152, 271  
Index  
ENWW  
319  
 
faxing 19  
scanning 164  
drivers  
errors  
software 282  
European Union, waste disposal  
reducing 149  
restore default settings 155  
counterfeit supplies 91  
cover pages  
changing paper types and  
sizes 74  
changing settings (Mac) 50  
changing settings (Windows)  
presets (Mac) 53  
settings 41  
settings (Mac) 53  
settings (Windows) 109  
supported (Windows) 38  
universal 40  
extension phones  
printing (Mac) 54  
printing on different paper  
(Windows) 129  
receiving faxes from 173  
sending faxes from 196  
custom print settings (Windows)  
custom-size copies 149  
custom-size paper settings  
Macintosh 53  
F
factory-set defaults, restoring 249  
fax  
answer mode 18, 184  
autoreduction 187  
billing codes 183  
blocking 185  
customer support  
online 296  
usage page 16  
canceling 190  
D
DSL  
confirming number 196  
contrast setting 182  
delaying sending 196  
deleting from memory 192  
detect-dial-tone settings 180  
darkness, contrast settings  
copy 154  
faxing 190  
duplex printing (double-sided)  
settings (Windows) 116  
duplex settings, changing 70  
fax 182  
default gateway, setting 69  
defaults, restoring 249  
defects, repeating 99, 269  
delaying fax sending 196  
deleting faxes from memory 192  
dial-tone detection settings 180  
dialing  
E
dia  
l prefixes 180  
e-mail, scanning to  
dialing, tone or pulse 181  
error report, printing 211  
error-correction 211  
extension phone receiving  
factory-set defaults, restoring  
forwarding 184  
pauses, inserting 180  
polling 189  
printing 198  
printing private faxes 198  
private receive 188  
receiving when you hear fax  
tones 199  
redial settings 181  
reports 32  
resolution settings 165  
EconoMode setting 90, 234  
economy settings 234  
Edge Control 142  
edge-to-edge printing 154  
electrical specifications 298  
electronic faxes  
from a telephone 196  
pauses, inserting 180  
prefixes, inserting 180  
redialing automatically,  
settings 181  
sending 195  
tone or pulse settings 181  
dimensions 298  
DIMMs  
Embedded Web Server (EWS)  
assigning passwords 233  
embedded Web server (EWS)  
features 232  
end-of-life disposal 303  
enlarging documents  
copying 149  
installing 236  
verifying installation 240  
disposal, end-of-life 303  
distinctive-ring settings 186  
document conventions iii  
document feeder  
environmental features  
environmental specifications 298  
environmental stewardship  
program 300  
reports, printing all 210  
reprinting faxes 187  
reprinting from memory 198  
resolution 182  
jams 253  
loading 83  
locating  
ePrint  
door release, locating  
dots per inch (dpi)  
fax 182  
double-sided printing (duplexing)  
Mac 55  
enabling or disabling 15  
error messages, fax 202, 212,  
error report, fax  
printing 211  
error-correction setting, fax 211  
ring patterns 186  
ring type 19  
rings-to-answer 185  
security, private receive 188  
sending from a telephone 196  
sending from software 195  
solve general problems 225  
dpi (dots per inch)  
fax 182  
320  
Index  
ENWW  
interface ports  
locating 7, 8  
IP address  
configuring 47  
obtaining 65  
IPv4 address 69  
ISDN  
speed dials 194  
stamp-received 188  
unable to receive 219  
unable to send 212  
using DSL, PBX, or ISDN 190  
using VoIP 191  
V.34 setting 212  
volume settings 187  
fax date, setup  
G
gateway, setting default 69  
glass, cleaning 153, 166, 241  
graph paper, printing 17  
grayscale  
printing (Windows) 124  
grayscale scanning 165  
group-dial entries  
creating 178  
faxing 190  
J
jams  
use control panel 174  
use HP Fax Setup Wizard  
deleting 178  
editing 178  
causes of 250  
H
help  
document feeder, clearing  
locating 252  
fax header, setup  
use control panel 174  
use HP Fax Setup Wizard  
printing options (Windows)  
output bin, clearing 259  
paper path, clearing 258  
tracking number of 16  
Japanese VCCI statement 310  
Jetadmin, HP Web 233  
help, control panel 12  
Home screen, control panel 11  
HP Customer Care 296  
HP Easy Color  
fax menu 32  
fax ports, locating 7, 8  
fax reports, printing 32  
fax time, setup  
disabling 143  
using 143  
HP Embedded Web Server 44  
HP ePrint  
use control panel 174  
use HP Fax Setup Wizard  
K
Korean EMC statement 311  
fax troubleshooting  
checklist 200  
L
description 52  
labels  
enabling or disabling 15  
HP ePrint, using 123  
HP fraud Web site 91  
HP Scan (Windows) 162  
HP Universal Print Driver 40  
HP Utility 51  
HP Utility, Mac 51  
HP Web Jetadmin 233  
HP Web Services menu 15  
HP Web Services, enabling 123  
HP-UX software 44  
humidity specifications  
environment 298  
faxing  
printing  
(Windows) 126  
from a computer (Mac) 58,  
from a computer (Windows)  
landscape orientation  
selecting, Windows 120  
laser safety statements 310, 311  
last page  
printing on different paper  
(Windows) 129  
letterhead  
printing (Windows) 124  
license, software 292  
lightness  
copy contrast 154  
fax contrast 182  
link speed settings 70  
Linux 44  
Finnish laser safety statement  
firewall 66  
first page  
printing on different paper  
(Windows) 129  
use different paper 54  
Fit to Page setting, fax 187  
fonts  
DIMMs, installing 236  
lists, printing 16  
permanent resources 240  
forms  
printing (Windows) 124  
forwarding faxes 184  
fraud Web site 91  
fuser  
I
identification cards  
copying 148  
input tray  
Linux software 44  
loading paper  
input tray 80  
logs, fax  
loading 80  
locating  
installing  
error 211  
printing all 210  
product on wired networks 65  
software, USB connections 64  
software, wired networks 66  
jams, clearing 258  
Index  
ENWW  
321  
Service 26  
System setup 21  
USB 35  
online support 296  
opening printer drivers  
(Windows) 109  
M
Mac  
changing paper types and  
menus, control panel  
HP Web Services 15  
map, printing 16  
Reports 16  
operating environment,  
specifications 298  
operating systems supported 38,  
sizes 53  
driver settings 50, 53  
faxing 58  
HP Utility 51  
installing software 46  
problems, troubleshooting  
mercury-free product 303  
Microsoft Word, faxing from 195  
model  
optical character recognition  
software 163  
ordering  
comparison  
number, locating  
modems, connecting 172  
multiple pages per sheet 55  
printing (Windows) 119  
music paper, printing 17  
supplies and accessories 286  
ordering supplies  
Web sites 285  
orientation  
selecting, Windows 120  
output bin  
removing software 49  
scanning from TWAIN-  
compliant software 162  
supported operating systems  
Macintosh  
jams, clearing 259  
resize documents 53  
support 296  
N
locating  
n-up printing 55  
selecting (Windows) 119  
network  
outside lines  
Macintosh driver settings  
custom-size paper 53  
watermarks 54  
dial prefixes 180  
pauses, inserting 180  
configuring 28  
managing network 68  
matching colors 144  
material restrictions 303  
Material Safety Data Sheet  
(MSDS) 304  
password, changing 69  
password, setting 69  
settings, changing 68  
settings, viewing 68  
Network config menu 28  
network port  
P
page count 16  
page sizes  
scaling documents to fit  
(Windows) 131  
media  
pages per minute  
custom-size, Macintosh  
settings 53  
locating 7, 8  
pages per sheet 55  
selecting (Windows) 119  
paper  
networks  
first page 54  
configuration page 16  
default gateway 69  
HP Web Jetadmin 233  
IPv4 address 69  
pages per sheet 55  
supported sizes 75  
memory  
co  
py se  
ttings 155  
covers, using different paper  
deleting faxes 192  
models supporting  
settings report 16  
subnet mask 69  
networks, wired  
installing product 65  
Neutral Grays 142  
non-HP supplies 91  
notebook paper, printing 17  
notes iii  
custom-size, Macintosh  
settings 53  
included  
installing 236  
part number 286  
permanent resources 240  
reprinting faxes 198  
verifying installation 240  
memory chip, print cartridge  
description 291  
menu  
default size for tray 85  
fax autoreduction settings 187  
first and last pages, using  
different paper 129  
first page 54  
jams 250  
pages per sheet 55  
printing on preprinted  
letterhead or forms  
(Windows) 124  
number of copies, changing 146  
control panel, access 14  
copy 30  
fax 32  
O
obtaining  
selecting 265  
Fax setup 18  
IP address 65  
OCR software 163  
online help, control panel 12  
supported sizes 75  
paper jams. See jams  
Network config 28  
Quick Forms 17  
scan 34  
322  
Index  
ENWW  
preprinted paper  
printing (Windows) 124  
presets (Mac) 53  
product  
model comparison  
serial number, locating  
protocol settings, fax 212  
PS Emulation drivers 38  
PS font list 16  
paper path  
jams, clearing 258  
paper pickup problems  
solving 250  
paper size  
changing 74  
paper sizes  
print cartridges  
checking for damage 98, 268  
door release, locating  
memory chips 291  
non-HP 91  
pulse-dialing 181  
selecting 114  
Q
quality  
selecting custom 115  
paper type  
part numbers 87, 286  
recycling 91, 301  
storage 91  
copy settings 152  
changing 262  
paper types  
supplies status page 16  
warranty 290  
R
changing 74  
selecting 115  
Readiris OCR software 163  
receiving faxes  
print job  
canceling 53, 108  
print media  
supported 75  
print quality  
improving 262  
improving (Windows) 114  
print quality page  
interpreting 98, 268  
printing 98, 268  
print-cartridges  
paper, ordering 286  
paper, special  
printing (Windows) 126  
pauses, inserting 180  
PBX  
faxing 190  
PCL drivers 38  
universal 40  
PCL font list 16  
permanent resources 240  
phone book, fax  
adding entries 194  
deleting all entries 177  
importing 176  
answer mode, setting 184  
autoreduction settings 187  
blocking  
error report, printing 211  
from extension phone 173  
polling 189  
reprinting 198  
reprinting faxes 187  
ring patterns, settings 186  
rings-to-answer settings 185  
stamp-received setting 188  
when you hear fax tones 199  
recycling 5, 301  
replacing 92  
printer driver  
configuring wireless network  
HP printing supplies returns  
and environmental program  
phones  
printer drivers  
receiving faxes from 173, 199  
phones, connecting extra 173  
phones, downstream  
sending faxes from 196  
photos  
choosing 269  
printer drivers (Mac)  
changing settings 50  
settings 53  
printer drivers (Windows)  
changing settings 41  
settings 109  
recycling supplies 91  
redialing  
automatically, settings 181  
reducing documents  
copying 149  
copying 156  
scanning 167  
removing Mac software 49  
removing Windows software 43  
repeating defects,  
troubleshooting 99, 269  
repetitive defects,  
physical specifications 298  
pixels per inch (ppi), scanning  
resolution 164  
polling faxes 189  
portrait orientation  
selecting, Windows 120  
ports  
locating 7, 8  
power  
consumption 298  
ppi (pixels per inch), scanning  
resolution 164  
supported 38  
printing  
edge-to-edge 154  
from USB storage  
accessories 136  
settings (Mac) 53  
settings (Windows) 109  
printing on both sides  
settings (Windows) 116  
priority, settings 41, 49  
private receive 188  
problem-solving  
troubleshooting 99, 269  
reports  
configuration page 230  
demo page 16, 230  
diagnostics page 231  
fax 32  
menu map 230  
network report 230  
PCL 6 font list 230  
prefixes, dial 180  
no response 272  
slow response 273  
Index  
ENWW  
323  
software license agreement  
Solaris 44  
supported operating systems  
uninstalling for Windows 43  
uninstalling Mac 49  
UNIX 44  
PCL font list 230  
print quality page 16, 231  
PS font list 230  
service page 230  
supplies status page 230  
usage page 230  
Reports menu 16  
reports, fax  
TWAIN-compliant software  
WIA-compliant software 162  
sending faxes  
billing codes 183  
canceling 190  
confirmation 196  
delaying 196  
error report, printing 211  
forwarding 184  
from downstream telephone  
Windows 44  
error 211  
printing all 210  
reprinting faxes 187, 198  
resize documents  
Macintosh 53  
Windows 131  
resizing documents  
copying 149  
Windows components 37  
Solaris software 44  
solve  
fax problems 212  
solve problems  
from software 195  
serial number, locating  
Service menu 26  
service page 16  
settings  
fax 225  
solving  
direct-connect problems 275  
network problems 275  
walk-up USB printing  
problems 274  
resolution  
fax 182  
scanning 164  
resource saving 240  
restoring factory-set defaults 249  
ring patterns 186  
ring tones  
driver presets (Mac) 53  
drivers 41  
drivers (Mac) 50  
factory-set defaults, restoring  
special paper  
printin  
g (Windows) 126  
specifications  
network report 16  
priority 41, 49  
distinctive 186  
rings-to-answer setting 185  
electrical and acoustic 298  
environmental 298  
physical 298  
shortcuts (Windows)  
creating 112  
S
using 111  
speed dials  
safety statements 310, 311  
saving resources, memory 240  
scale documents  
Macintosh 53  
Windows 131  
scaling documents  
copying 149  
size 298  
size, copy  
reducing or enlarging 149  
sizes, media  
Fit to Page setting, faxing 187  
sleep delay  
programming 194  
speed-dial entries  
creating 177, 178  
editing 177, 178  
status  
Home screen, control panel  
disabling 234  
scan menu 34  
scanner  
glass cleaning 153, 166, 241,  
scanning  
enabling 234  
small documents  
copying 148  
HP Utility, Mac 51  
supplies, printing report 16  
storing  
environmental specifications  
print cartridges 91  
subnet mask 69  
supplies  
software  
embedded Web server 44  
HP Utility 51  
installing, USB connections  
black and white 165  
canceling 163  
color 164  
from HP Scan (Windows) 162  
from Mac software 59  
grayscale 165  
methods 162  
OCR software 163  
photos 167  
installing, wired networks 66  
Linux 44  
problems 282  
Readiris OCR 163  
scanning from TWAIN or WIA  
counterfeit 91  
non-HP 91  
ordering 285, 286  
recycling 91, 301  
status, viewing with HP Utility  
resolution 164  
sending faxes 195  
settings 41, 49  
supplies status page 16  
printing 97, 267  
324  
Index  
ENWW  
receive fax 219  
repeating defects 99, 269  
send fax 212  
walk-up USB printing  
problems 274  
HP Web Jetadmin,  
downloading 233  
Macintosh customer support  
Material Safety Data Sheet  
(MSDS) 304  
support  
online 296  
supported media 75  
System setup menu 21  
T
TWAIN-compliant software,  
scanning from 162  
two-sided printing  
TCP/IP  
ordering supplies 285  
universal print driver 40  
manually configuring IPv4  
parameters 69  
technical support  
online 296  
settings (Windows) 116  
weight 298  
WIA-compliant software, scanning  
from 162  
U
telephones  
unblocking fax numbers 185  
uninstalling Mac software 49  
uninstalling Windows software 43  
universal print driver 40  
UNIX 44  
UNIX software 44  
usage page 16  
USB  
configuring wireless network  
USB cable, part number 286  
USB configuration 64  
USB menu 35  
Windows  
receiving faxes from 173, 199  
telephones, connecting extra 173  
telephones, downstream  
sending faxes from 196  
temperature specifications  
environment 298  
tips iii  
tone-dialing 181  
toner cartridges. See print  
cartridges  
driver settings 41  
drivers supported 38  
faxing from 195  
scanning from TWAIN or WIA  
soft  
ware 162  
software components 37, 44  
supported operating systems  
universal print driver 40  
wireless  
configuring 28  
wireless network  
touch screen, clean 243  
transparencies  
printing (Windows) 126  
trapping 142  
USB port  
configuring with the setup  
wizard 67  
locating 7, 8  
Tray 1  
USB storage accessories  
printing from 136  
configuring with USB 49, 67  
configuring with WPS 48, 67  
installing the driver 68  
wireless network connection 66  
Wireless Setup Wizard  
configuring wireless network  
double-sided printing 55  
jams, clearing 255  
Tray 2  
jams, clearing 257  
Tray 3  
V
V.34 setting 212  
VoIP  
faxing 191  
volume  
settings 22  
volume, adjusting 187  
part number 286  
trays  
Word, faxing from 195  
WPS  
default paper size 85  
double-sided printing 55  
included  
jams, clearing 257  
locating  
configuring wireless network  
W
walk-up USB printing 136  
warnings iii  
warranty  
selecting (Windows) 115  
troubleshooting  
license 292  
checklist 247  
print cartridges 290  
product 288  
watermarks 54  
adding (Windows) 133  
Web printing  
direct-connect problems 275  
fax error-correction setting  
faxes 200  
jams 250  
HP ePrint 52  
Web sites 44  
customer support 296  
fraud reports 91  
Mac problems 283  
network problems 275  
paper feed problems 250  
Index  
ENWW  
325  
326  
Index  
ENWW  
© 2011 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.  
www.hp.com  
*CE863-90907*  
*CE863-90907*  
CE863-90907  

Brother MFC 8820D User Manual
Daewoo DWC 092C User Manual
Danby DKC445BL User Manual
Epson C11C633001 User Manual
Ford F 350 User Manual
Friedrich HAZARDGARD SH20L30 B User Manual
Fujitsu Air Conditioner ASU12RLS User Manual
Fujitsu ASU36CLX User Manual
Honda Automobiles GXV670 User Manual
Honeywell NIAGARA CP 700 User Manual